Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
ISOVDMA A -UK
ISO/VDMA Cylinders
Complete range of
ISO/VDMA cylinders and accessories
Series C95
Series CP95
Series C85
Series C55
Quick
Reference
Guide
Quick Reference
Guide
Ordeer
Mad
-X
(Made to Order)
C55
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
C85
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
C76
Air Cylinder
(mm)
10
12
CP95
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
C95
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
D(Auto Switch)
Model Selection
Procedures
(mm)
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
Quick
Reference
Guide
1-1
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Series C85
Air Cylinder [ISO 6432 and CETOP RP52P]
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
Specifications 1)
Action
Double acting
Fluid
Air
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Piston speed
Cushion
Port size
How to Order
1)
C85 Standard Stroke Variation with Rubber Cushion applicable for auto-switch1)
Cylinder bore size (mm)
Standard stroke 2)
(mm)
10
12
16
20
25
10
CD85N8-10-B
CD85N10-10-B
CD85N12-10-B
CD85N16-10-B
CD85N20-10-B
CD85N25-10-B
25
CD85N8-25-B
CD85N10-25-B
CD85N12-25-B
CD85N16-25-B
CD85N20-25-B
CD85N25-25-B
40
CD85N8-40-B
CD85N10-40-B
CD85N12-40-B
CD85N16-40-B
CD85N20-40-B
CD85N25-40-B
50
CD85N8-50-B
CD85N10-50-B
CD85N12-50-B
CD85N16-50-B
CD85N20-50-B
CD85N25-50-B
80
CD85N8-80-B
CD85N10-80-B
CD85N12-80-B
CD85N16-80-B
CD85N20-80-B
CD85N25-80-B
100
CD85N8-100-B
CD85N10-100-B
CD85N12-100-B
CD85N16-100-B
CD85N20-100-B
CD85N25-100-B
125
CD85N12-125-B
CD85N16-125-B
CD85N20-125-B
CD85N25-125-B
160
CD85N12-160-B
CD85N16-160-B
CD85N20-160-B
CD85N25-160-B
200
CD85N12-200-B
CD85N16-200-B
CD85N20-200-B
CD85N25-200-B
250
CD85N16-250-B
CD85N20-250-B
CD85N25-250-B
300
CD85N16-300-B
CD85N20-300-B
CD85N25-300-B
C85 Standard Stroke Variation with Air Cushion applicable for auto-switch1)
Cylinder bore size (mm)
Standard stroke 2)
(mm)
10
12
16
20
25
10
CD85N10-10C-B
CD85N12-10C-B
CD85N16-10C-B
CD85N20-10C-B
CD85N25-10C-B
25
CD85N10-25C-B
CD85N12-25C-B
CD85N16-25C-B
CD85N20-25C-B
CD85N25-25C-B
40
CD85N10-40C-B
CD85N12-40C-B
CD85N16-40C-B
CD85N20-40C-B
CD85N25-40C-B
50
CD85N10-50C-B
CD85N12-50C-B
CD85N16-50C-B
CD85N20-50C-B
CD85N25-50C-B
80
CD85N10-80C-B
CD85N12-80C-B
CD85N16-80C-B
CD85N20-80C-B
CD85N25-80C-B
100
CD85N10-100C-B
CD85N12-100C-B
CD85N16-100C-B
CD85N20-100C-B
CD85N25-100C-B
125
CD85N12-125C-B
CD85N16-125C-B
CD85N20-125C-B
CD85N25-125C-B
160
CD85N12-160C-B
CD85N16-160C-B
CD85N20-160C-B
CD85N25-160C-B
200
CD85N12-200C-B
CD85N16-200C-B
CD85N20-200C-B
CD85N25-200C-B
250
CD85N16-250C-B
CD85N20-250C-B
CD85N25-250C-B
300
CD85N16-300C-B
CD85N20-300C-B
CD85N25-300C-B
1-2
Series C85
Auto Switches
Auto-switch for C85 (24VDC)1)
Description 2)
How to order
D-M9PL
D-M9PSBPC
D-M9PSDPC
C55
BJ3-1
8 to 25
BJ3-1
C85
BJ2-008
BJ2-010
10
BJ2-012
12
BJ2-016
16
BM2-020
20
BM2-025
25
BJ2-
BM2-
CP95
How to order
C76
D-C73L
Quick Reference
Guide
D-M9PSAPC
Mounting Accessories
Foot
(1 pc.)
Foot
(2 pc.)
Flange
Trunnion
Clevis
C85L10A
C85L10B
C85F10
C85T10
C85C10
C85L10A
C85L10B
C85F10
C85T10
C85C10
12
C85L16A
C85L16B
C85F16
C85T16
C85C16
16
C85L16A
C85L16B
C85F16
C85T16
C85C16
20
C85L25A
C85L25B
C85F25
C85T25
C85C25
25
C85L25A
C85L25B
C85F25
C85T25
C85C25
D(Auto Switch)
8
10
-X
(Made to Order)
Bore size
(mm)
C95
Bore size
(mm)
Single Knuckle
Joint
Double Knuckle
Joint
Flotating
Joint
KJ4D
GKM4-8
JA10-4-070
10
KJ4D
GKM4-8
JA10-4-070
12
KJ6D
GKM6-10
JA15-6-100
16
KJ6D
GKM6-10
JA15-6-100
20
KJ8D
GKM8-16
JA20-8-125
25
KJ10D
GKM10-20
JA30-10-125
Model Selection
Procedures
1-3
Series C76
Air Cylinder
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
Specifications 1)
Action
Double acting
Fluid
Air
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Piston speed
Cushion
Rubber cushion
Port size
How to Order 1)
1) For further cylinder variation please refer to chapter C76.
C76 Standard Stroke Variation with Rubber Cushion applicable for auto-switch1)
Cylinder bore size (mm)
Standard stroke 2)
(mm)
32
40
10
CD76E32-10-B
CD76E40-10-B
25
CD76E32-25-B
CD76E40-25-B
40
CD76E32-40-B
CD76E40-40-B
50
CD76E32-50-B
CD76E40-50-B
80
CD76E32-80-B
CD76E40-80-B
100
CD76E32-100-B
CD76E40-100-B
125
CD76E32-125-B
CD76E40-125-B
160
CD76E32-160-B
CD76E40-160-B
200
CD76E32-200-B
CD76E40-200-B
250
CD76E32-250-B
CD76E40-250-B
300
CD76E32-300-B
CD76E40-300-B
1-4
Series C76
Auto Switches
Auto-switch for C76 (24VDC)1)
Description 2)
How to order
D-M9PL
D-M9PSBPC
D-M9PSDPC
D-C73L
Quick Reference
Guide
D-M9PSAPC
C55
BJ3-1
How to order
BJ3-1
32, 40
C85
How to order
BM2-032
32
BM2-040
40
C76
CP95
BM2-
Mounting Accessories
Foot
(1 pc.)
Flange, Foot
(2 pc.)
Trunnion
Clevis
32
C76F32A
C76F32B
C76T32
C76C32
40
C76F40A
C76F40B
C76T40
C76C40
-X
(Made to Order)
Bore size
(mm)
C95
Single Knuckle
Joint
Double Knuckle
Joint
Flotating
Joint
32
KJ10DA
GKM10-20A
JA25-10-150
40
KJ12DA
GKM12-24A
JA40-12-175
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore size
(mm)
D(Auto Switch)
1-5
Series CP95
Air Cylinder [ISO 6431, VDMA 24562, CETOP RP43P]
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
Specifications 1)
Action
Double acting
Fluid
Air
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Piston speed
Cushion
Port size
(32): G1/8; (40, 50): G1/4; (63, 80): G3/8; (100): G1/2
How to Order 1)
1) For further cylinder variation please refer to chapter CP95.
Standard stroke 2)
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
25
CP95SDB32-25
CP95SDB40-25
CP95SDB50-25
CP95SDB63-25
CP95SDB80-25
CP95SDB100-25
50
CP95SDB32-50
CP95SDB40-50
CP95SDB50-50
CP95SDB63-50
CP95SDB80-50
CP95SDB100-50
80
CP95SDB32-80
CP95SDB40-80
CP95SDB50-80
CP95SDB63-80
CP95SDB80-80
CP95SDB100-80
100
CP95SDB32-100
CP95SDB340100
CP95SDB50-100
CP95SDB63-100
CP95SDB80-100
CP95SDB100-100
125
CP95SDB32-125
CP95SDB40-125
CP95SDB50-125
CP95SDB63-125
CP95SDB80-125
CP95SDB100-125
160
CP95SDB32-160
CP95SDB40-160
CP95SDB50-160
CP95SDB63-160
CP95SDB80-160
CP95SDB100-160
200
CP95SDB32-200
CP95SDB40-200
CP95SDB50-200
CP95SDB63-200
CP95SDB80-200
CP95SDB100-200
250
CP95SDB32-250
CP95SDB40-250
CP95SDB50-250
CP95SDB63-250
CP95SDB80-250
CP95SDB100-250
320
CP95SDB32-320
CP95SDB40-320
CP95SDB50-320
CP95SDB63-320
CP95SDB80-320
CP95SDB100-320
400
CP95SDB32-400
CP95SDB40-400
CP95SDB50-400
CP95SDB63-400
CP95SDB80-400
CP95SDB100-400
500
CP95SDB32-500
CP95SDB40-500
CP95SDB50-500
CP95SDB63-500
CP95SDB80-500
CP95SDB100-500
600
CP95SDB50-600
CP95SDB63-600
CP95SDB80-600
CP95SDB100-600
1-6
Series CP95
Auto Switches
Auto-switch for CP95 (24VDC)1)
Description 2)
How to order
D-M9PL
D-M9PSBPC
D-M9PSDPC
D-Z73L
Quick Reference
Guide
D-M9PSAPC
C55
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
BMP1-032
D-M9
C85
BMG2-012
Applicable
cylinder
bore size
BMP1-032
32 to 100
D-Z73
C76
How to order
Applicable
auto switch
CP95
Mounting Accessories
Mounting Bracket for CP95
Angled rear
clevis with
ball joint
Flange
Single rear
clevis
Double rear
clevis
32
L5032
F5032
C5032
D5032
DS5032
CS5032
ES5032
E5032
40
L5040
F5040
C5040
D5040
DS5040
CS5040
ES5040
E5040
50
L5050
F5050
C5050
D5050
DS5050
CS5050
ES5050
E5050
63
L5063
F5063
C5063
D5063
DS5063
CS5063
ES5063
E5063
80
L5080
F5080
C5080
D5080
DS5080
CS5080
ES5080
E5080
L5100
F5100
C5100
D5100
DS5100
CS5100
ES5100
E5100
D(Auto Switch)
100
Angled rear
clevis
C95
Single rear
clevis with
ball joint
Foot
(2 pc.)
-X
(Made to Order)
Double rear
clevis
(for ES accessory)
Bore size
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Flotating
Joint
32
KJ10D
GKM10-20
JA30-10-125
40
KJ12D
GKM12-24
JA40-12-125
50
KJ16D
GKM16-32
JA50-16-150
63
KJ16D
GKM16-32
JA50-16-150
80
KJ20D
GKM20-40
JAH50-20-150
100
KJ20D
GKM20-40
JAH50-20-150
Model Selection
Procedures
1-7
Series C95
Air Cylinder [ISO 6431, VDMA24562, CETOP RP43P]
(mm)
10
12
16 20
25 32 40
50
63
Specifications 1)
Action
Double acting
Fluid
Air
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Piston speed
Cushion
Port size
(32): G1/8; (40, 50): G1/4; (63, 80): G3/8; (100): G1/2
How to Order
1)
C95 Standard Stroke Variation applicable for auto-switch1) (Bore size 32 to 100) 2)
Cylinder bore size (mm)
Standard stroke 3)
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
25
C95SDB32-25
C95SDB40-25
C95SDB50-25
C95SDB63-25
C95SDB80-25
C95SDB100-25
50
C95SDB32-50
C95SDB40-50
C95SDB50-50
C95SDB63-50
C95SDB80-50
C95SDB100-50
80
C95SDB32-80
C95SDB40-80
C95SDB50-80
C95SDB63-80
C95SDB80-80
C95SDB100-80
100
C95SDB32-100
C95SDB340100
C95SDB50-100
C95SDB63-100
C95SDB80-100
C95SDB100-100
125
C95SDB32-125
C95SDB40-125
C95SDB50-125
C95SDB63-125
C95SDB80-125
C95SDB100-125
160
C95SDB32-160
C95SDB40-160
C95SDB50-160
C95SDB63-160
C95SDB80-160
C95SDB100-160
200
C95SDB32-200
C95SDB40-200
C95SDB50-200
C95SDB63-200
C95SDB80-200
C95SDB100-200
250
C95SDB32-250
C95SDB40-250
C95SDB50-250
C95SDB63-250
C95SDB80-250
C95SDB100-250
320
C95SDB32-320
C95SDB40-320
C95SDB50-320
C95SDB63-320
C95SDB80-320
C95SDB100-320
400
C95SDB32-400
C95SDB40-400
C95SDB50-400
C95SDB63-400
C95SDB80-400
C95SDB100-400
500
C95SDB32-500
C95SDB40-500
C95SDB50-500
C95SDB63-500
C95SDB80-500
C95SDB100-500
600
C95SDB50-600
C95SDB63-600
C95SDB80-600
C95SDB100-600
1-8
Series C95
Auto Switches
Auto-switch for C95 (24VDC)1)
Description 2)
How to order
D-M9PL
D-M9PSBPC
D-M9PSDPC
D-Z73L
Quick Reference
Guide
D-M9PSAPC
C55
D-M9
Applicable
auto switch
BMB5-032
BA7-040
D-M9
BA7-063
D-Z73
50, 63
80, 100
BMB4-032
BMB4-050
Applicable
cylinder
bore size
32, 40
C76
How to order
C85
32, 40
D-Z73
BA4-063
50, 63
CP95
80, 100
Mounting Accessories
Foot
(2 pc.)
Flange
Single rear
clevis
Double rear
clevis
Double rear
clevis
(for ES accessory)
Single rear
clevis with
ball joint
Angled rear
clevis with
ball joint
Angled rear
clevis
Trunnion pivot
bracket
32
L5032
F5032
C5032
D5032
DS5032
CS5032
ES5032
E5032
C95-S03
ES5040
E5040
C95-S04
L5040
F5040
C5040
D5040
DS5040
50
L5050
F5050
C5050
D5050
DS5050
CS5050
ES5050
E5050
C95-S04
63
L5063
F5063
C5063
D5063
DS5063
CS5063
ES5063
E5063
C95-S06
80
L5080
F5080
C5080
D5080
DS5080
CS5080
ES5080
E5080
C95-S06
100
L5100
F5100
C5100
D5100
DS5100
CS5100
ES5100
E5100
C95-S10
D(Auto Switch)
40
CS5040
-X
(Made to Order)
Bore size
(mm)
C95
Bore size
(mm)
Flotating
Joint
32
KJ10D
GKM10-20
JA30-10-125
40
KJ12D
GKM12-24
JA40-12-125
50
KJ16D
GKM16-32
JA50-16-150
63
KJ16D
GKM16-32
JA50-16-150
80
KJ20D
GKM20-40
JAH50-20-150
100
KJ20D
GKM20-40
JAH50-20-150
Model Selection
Procedures
1-9
1-10
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
C55
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
2-1
Series C55
Without
auto switch
C55 B 20 10
CD55 B 20 10
M9B S
Number of auto switches
Built in magnet
S
n
Mounting style
B
L
F
G
C
Through-hole/Both ends
tapped common (Standard)
Foot style
Rod side flange style
Head side flange style
Single clevis style
Bore size
20
25
32
40
50
63
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Auto switch
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the table below.
Auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled).
Reed
switch
Type
Special Electrical
entry
function
Grommet
Indicator
light
Yes
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
DC
24 V
3-wire (NPN)
AC
5V
12 V
100 V
5 V, 12 V 100 V or less
Pre-wired
connector
3
(L)
5
(Z)
IC
circuit
Relay,
PLC
A93V
A93
A90V
A90
IC
circuit
M9NV
M9N
M9PV
M9P
IC
circuit
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
12 V
M9BV
M9B
Diagnostic
indication
3-wire (NPN)
5V
12 V
F9NWV
F9NW
F9PWV
F9PW
F9BWV
F9BW
F9BA
2-colour
indication
Water
resistant
2-colour
indication
Grommet
2-wire
12 V
Applicable
load
0.5
(Nil)
5V
12 V
2-2
IC
Relay,
circuit PLC
Series C55
Specifications
Type
Pneumatic (Non-lube)
Action
Fluid
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to 70C (No freezing)
With auto switch: 10 to 60C (No freezing)
50 to 500 mm/s
IN
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 80, 100, 125, 150
C76
OUT
C85
Standard Stroke
20 to 63
Theoretical
Output
C55
Cushion
Caution
Quick Reference
Guide
Air
Proof pressure
Unit: N
40
50
63
71
118
165
OUT
94
157
220
IN
113
189
264
OUT
147
245
344
IN
181
302
422
OUT
241
402
563
IN
317
528
739
OUT
377
628
880
IN
495
825
1150
OUT
589
982
1370
IN
841
1400
1960
OUT
935
1560
2180
Foot
Flange
Single
clevis
20
C55-L020
C55-F020
C55-C020
25
C55-L025
C55-F025
C55-C025
32
40
C55-L032
C55-L040
C55-F032
C55-F040
Refer to How to Order for the standard model no. (page at left)
6 to 149
C55-C032
C55-C040
50
C55-L050
C55-F050
C55-C050
63
C55-L063
C55-F063
C55-C063
CP95
IN
Example
Weight
Without Auto Swtich
Bore size
(mm)
Unit: g
Cylinder stroke (mm)
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
80
20
228
254
306
357
422
487
25
292
323
386
448
526
603
32
451
495
584
673
785
896
40
533
582
679
776
897 1018
50
828
63
677 717 757 797 837 877 917 957 997 1037 1117 1277 1437 1638 1838
C95
32
Part no.
Stroke range
0.7
Unit: g
50
60
80
20
10
216
229
255
307
359
424
489
25
279
294
325
388
450
528
606
32
432
455
499
588
677
788
900
40
513
537
586
683
780
901 1022
50
796
833
63
685 725 765 805 845 885 925 965 1005 1045 1125 1285 1445 1645 1845
15
20
25
30
35
40
-X
(Made to Order)
25
0.5
D(Auto Switch)
20
0.3
Description
Add each weight of auto switches and mounting brackets when mounting an auto switches.
2-3
Model Selection
Procedures
Series C55
Allowable Lateral Load
Operation outside of this range may result in shorter service life or damage to the device.
Lateral load
Operation outside of this range may cause excessive impact, which may
result in the damage to the device.
Operating pressure: 1 MPa
1000
500
300
200
Stroke
Eccentric distance
100
Load weight (kg)
100
10
63
50
40
63
1
32
25
0.1
10
20
1
0
50
100
150
200
Refer to Model Selection in Best Pneumatics catalogue for details about model selection procedure.
2-4
32
25
20
50
40
10
100
200 300
500
1000
Series C55
Construction
20, 25
i t r !4 !2 y q e !3 o w u
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
!0
32 to 63
!0
CP95
C76
C85
!2 r t i !4 y q e !3 o w u
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
!1
Description
Note
Cylinder tube
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Stainless steel
20, 25
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
20 to 40 Anodized
Piston rod
Collar
Snap ring
Phosphate coated
Bumper A
Urethane
Bumper B
Bushing
Urethane
20, 25
32 to 63
Wear ring
Magnet
11
12
Rod seal
NBR
13
Piston seal
NBR
14
Tube gasket
NBR
20
25
32
40
50
63
Kit no.
Contents
CQ2B20-PS
CQ2B25-PS
CQ2B32-PS
CQ2B40-PS
Set of nos.
above
!2, !3, !4
CQ2B50-PS
CQ2B63-PS
Seal kit includes !2, !3, !4. Order the seal kit,
based on each bore size.
10
Bore size
(mm)
Resin
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
2-5
D(Auto Switch)
No.
Model Selection
Procedures
Component Parts
Series C55
Mounting Bolt
Should use recommended bolt shown as below table
when mounting the cylinder using through-hole.
Mounting
bolt
OA thread
C(D)55B20-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
-50
-60
-80
-100
-125
-150
C(D)55B25-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
-50
-60
-80
-100
-125
-150
2-6
7.2
D
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
Mounting bolt
M4 x 45 l
x 50 l
x 55 l
x 60 l
x 65 l
x 70 l
x 75 l
x 80 l
x 85 l
x 90 l
10.2
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
M4 x 50 l
x 55 l
x 60 l
x 65 l
x 70 l
x 75 l
x 80 l
x 85 l
x 90 l
x 95 l
Model
C(D)55B32-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
-50
-60
-80
-100
-125
-150
C(D)55B40-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
-50
-60
-80
-100
-125
-150
10
D Mounting bolt
55
M5 x 55 l
60
x 60 l
65
x 65 l
70
x 70 l
75
x 75 l
80
x 80 l
85
x 85 l
90
x 90 l
95
x 95 l
100
x 100 l
110
x 110 l
130
x 130 l
150
x 150 l
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
110
130
150
M5 x 55 l
x 60 l
x 65 l
x 70 l
x 75 l
x 80 l
x 85 l
x 90 l
x 95 l
x 100 l
x 110 l
x 130 l
x 150 l
Model
C(D)55B50-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
-50
-60
-80
-100
-125
-150
C(D)55B63-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
-50
-60
-80
-100
-125
-150
8.4
D Mounting bolt
55
M6 x 55 l
60
x 60 l
65
x 65 l
70
x 70 l
75
x 75 l
80
x 80 l
85
x 85 l
90
x 90 l
95
x 95 l
100
x 100 l
110
x 110 l
130
x 130 l
150
x 150 l
9.4
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
115
135
155
M6 x 60 l
x 65 l
x 70 l
x 75 l
x 80 l
x 85 l
x 90 l
x 95 l
x 100 l
x 105 l
x 115 l
x 135 l
x 155 l
Series C55
Dimensions
20, 25
2-M5
Port size
H thread
2 x 4-OB
counterbore RB
5.5
2
effective depth C
2 x 4-RA
(RB)
B + Stroke
A + Stroke
C76
25
Basic Style
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
43
37
10
10
36
5.5
M6
45
39
10
12
40
5.5
M6
OA
OB
RA
RB
43
22
4.5
M5
7.5
13
10
0.8
48
10
26
4.5
M5
7.5
13
10
0.8
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
20
2 x 4-OA
C85
Flat washer
4 pcs.
4-N through
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Auto switch
D(Auto Switch)
Model Selection
Procedures
H1
C
X
L
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
B1
H1
20
25
13
14
10
M8
13
14
12
M8
22
16
10
22
16
2-7
Series C55
Dimensions
32 to 63
2-G1/8
Port size
Auto switch
H thread
effective depth C
2 x 4-OB
counterbore RB
Flat washer
4 pcs.
4-N through
2 x 4-OA
2 x 4-RA
(RB)
B + Stroke
A + Stroke
Basic Style
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
51
44
12
16
46
8.5
52
45
12
16
52
9.5
53
45
16
20
64
57
49
16
20
74
OA
OB
RA
RB
M8
59
14
32.5
5.5
M6
14.5
11
15
M8
67
14
38
5.5
M6
14.5
11
17
10.5
M10
82
17
46.5
6.6
M8
10.5 13.5
11
1.6
17
14.5
M10
96
17
56.5
6.6
M8
10.5 15.5
11
1.6
17
H1
C
X
L
2-8
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
B1
H1
32
40
50
63
17
16.5
16
M10 x 1.25
14
26
19
17
16.5
16
M10 x 1.25
14
26
19
19
19.5
20
M12 x 1.25
17
30
22
19
19.5
20
M12 x 1.25
17
30
22
Series C55
Mounting Bracket
Flange bracket
2 x FD
Hexagon socket
head cap screw
(accessory)
FL
Quick Reference
Guide
Foot bracket
4 x FD
C55
FX
M
M/2
LH
LT
2 x LD
FZ
Hexagon socket
head cap screw
LX
FY
FT
LZ
Y X
20
25
32
40
50
63
LD LH LT LX LZ
22
27
22
36
22
16
M5
22
29
26
40
26
10
16
M5
24.5
33.5
32
46
32.5 15
16
M6
18
M6
17.5
26
10
38
36
52
38
31
10
45
45
64
46.5 20
21
M8
31
10
50
50
74
56.5 22.5
21
M8
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
50
63
DH11 M
FD FL
FT FV FX FY FZ
16
22
6.6
2.8
38
55
68
M5
16
26
6.6
2.8
38
60
73
M5
30
32.5 7
10
50
64
32
79
M6
35
38
10
55
72
36
90
M6
40
46.5 9
12
70
90
45
110
M8
45
56.5 9
12
80
100
50
120
M8
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
CL
D(Auto Switch)
CZ
CD hole H9
CX
M
CU
CZ
Model Selection
Procedures
CW RR
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
50
63
CDH9 CL
CP95
Bore size
(mm)
Hexagon
socket
head cap
screw
C76
(mm)
(mm)
Hexagon
socket
head cap
screw
C85
FV
32 to 63
20, 25
CU CW CX-0.2
-0.6 CZ
RR
Hexagon
socket
head cap
screw
12
20
16
35
22
M5
12
20
16
40
26
M5
10
5.5
12
22
26
45
32.5
9.5
M6
12
5.5
15
25
28
51
38
12
M6
12
6.5
15
27
32
64
46.5 12
M8
16
6.5
20
32
40
74
56.5 16
M8
2-9
Series C55
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Reed switch
D-A9
D-M9
D-F9BAL
D-F9 W
Hs
20, 25
Hs
Figures in the table below are used as a reference when mounting the auto
switches for stroke end detection. In the case of actually setting the auto
switches, adjust them after confirming their operation.
Auto switch model
Symbol
D-M9
D-F9 W
D-A9
20
25
32
40
50
63
11.5
5.5 3.5(1)
11.5
7.5 5.5(3)
Bore size
15
9
7 (4.5)
(mm)
16
9
7 (4.5)
9.5 15.5 13.5(11.5)
11.5 17.5 15.5(13.5)
The dimension inside ( ) is for D-A93.
Reed switch
D-A9 V
D-M9 V
D-F9 WV
(mm)
D-F9BAL
Hs
15.5
15.5
19
20
13.5
15.5
9.5
11.5
13
13
19.5
21.5
-0.5
1.5
3
3
9.5
11.5
14.5
14.5
18
19
12.5
14.5
8.5
10.5
12
12
18.5
20.5
-9.5
-7.5
-6
-6
0.5
2.5
22
24
27
30
36
41
Hs
Hs
20, 25
Bore size
(mm)
2-10
20
25
32
40
50
63
D-A9
D-M9 V
D-F9 WV
Hs
Hs
11.5
11.5
15
16
9.5
11.5
5.5
7.5
9
9
15.5
17.5
22
24
27
30
36
41
15.5
15.5
19
20
13.5
15.5
9.5
11.5
13
13
19.5
21.5
24
26
29
32
38
43
Series C55
The Number of Surfaces and Grooves Where an Auto Switch Can Be Mounted (As Direct Mounting)
Piping port
B
View from
piston rod end
(Mounting
groove no.)
20
(1)
25
(2)
32
(2)
40
(2)
50
(2)
63
(2)
D-A9, M9, F9
B
C
(Mounting
groove no.)
(Mounting
groove no.)
(Mounting
groove no.)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
C55
Switch model
Bore size
(mm)
Quick Reference
Guide
The number of the surfaces and grooves where the auto switch can be mounted, by switch type, are shown in the table below.
(2)
(2)
C85
Operating Range
(mm)
D-F9W(V)
D-F9BAL
D-A9(V)
D-M9(V)
20
25
32
40
50
63
5.5
6.5
10.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
C76
Bore size
CP95
A9V
D-M9
D-M9V
D-F9W
D-F9WV
D-F9BAL
20
2 pcs.
10
10
15
15
10
20
1 pc.
10
15
15
20
2 pcs.
10
10
10
10
10
25,32,40,50
20
1 pc.
10
10
10
20
2 pcs.
10
10
10
10
10
63
15
1 pc.
10
15
C95
D-A9
-X
(Made to Order)
Bore size
(mm)
Part no.
D-F9G
D-F9H
Electrical entry
Features
Grommet (In-line)
Model Selection
Procedures
Type
D(Auto Switch)
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to Best Pneumatics for detailed specifications.
2-11
Series C55
Mounting of Auto Switch
To mount auto switches, follow the instruction illustrated below.
20 to 63 /Direct mounting
Auto switch
Use a watchmakers screwdriver with a handle 5 to 6 mm in diameter when tightening the auto
switch mounting screw.
Tightening torque should be set 0.10 to 0.20 N.m.
2-12
ISO Cylinder
Series
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Variations
Standard
Series C85
Rod
style
Cushion
Switch mount
Y
Rail
Band
Rot boot
(20, 25)
Bore
(mm)
Page
C95
Action
Rubber
8 to 25
Air
10 to 25
Rubber
8 to 25
Air
10 to 25
Rubber
8
to 25
3-16
Single
Double
acting
3-2
Double
Single
acting
Single
(SR, SE)
-X
(Made to Order)
Series
Double
acting
Single
Rubber
8
to 25
3-2
Single
acting
Single
(SR, SE)
Rubber
8
to 25
3-16
Base Double
acting
Single
Rubber
Front Double
acting
Single
Rubber
8
to 25
3-30
Mounting style
20, 25
SR=Spring return
SE=Spring extend
3-1
Model Selection
Procedures
Non-rotating rod
D(Auto Switch)
C85
Series
How to Order
Double acting
Single rod
C D 85
Double acting
Double rod
C D 85 W
K N
20
40 C
A XC6
E 20
40 C
JJ
Magnet
None
D Built-in magnet
Auto switch
mounting style
Style
A
B
Standard
Non-rotating rod
K
(only rubber bumper)
Mounting
Symbol
Basic integrated clevis
N
Double end
E
Boss cut
F
Y Boss cut - End port
J
K
JJ
KK
Bore size-Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
8
10
12
16
20
25
Standard stroke
(mm)
Max. stroke
Non-rotating Double rod
Standard
Rail
Band
100
100
200
200
1000
500
400
1000
Cushion
Foot (1 pc.)
Foot (2 pcs. with
mounting nut 1 pc.)
Flange
Trunnion
Clevis
Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint
Floating joint
10
12
16
20
25
C85L10A
C85L16A
C85L25A
C85L10B
C85L16B
C85L25B
C85F10
C85T10
C85C10
KJ4D
GKM4-8
C85F16
C85T16
C85C16
KJ6D
GKM6-10
JA10-4-070
JA15-6-100
C85F25
C85T25
C85C25
KJ8D KJ10D
GKM8-16 GKM10-20
JA20 JA30
-8-125 -10-125
Replacement Parts
For Standard Cylinders
Bore (mm)
Kit No.
20
C85-20PS
25
C85-25PS
Kit No.
20
C85K-20PS
25
C85K-25PS
3-2
Note
Every set includes:
1 rod seal
1 packing retaining washer
1 retaining ring
Note
Every set includes:
1 rod seal
1 packing retaining washer
1 retaining ring
Series
C85
Specifications
Bore size (mm)
10
12
16
20
25
10
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10 X 1.25
Ports
M5
M5
M5
M5
G1/8
G1/8
Action
1.0MPa
0.1MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper, Air cushion (Except for 8) (Non-rotating: only rubber bumper)
Lubrication
Max ambient
temperature 60C
Neoprene
cloth
Max ambient
temperature 110C
Allowable
kinetic
energy
50 to 1500mm/s
Rubber
bumper
0.02J
0.03J
0.04J
0.09J
0.27J
0.4J
Air
cushion
0.17J
0.19J
0.4J
0.66J
0.97J
1 30'
1 30'
0 42'
0 42'
Non-rotating accuracy
Non-rotating rod/Single Rod
Stroke tolerance
C76
Rod boot
Nylon
tarpaulin
Piston speed
0.05MPa
0/+1.4
0/+1
Rubber Bumper
16
Basic weight
45
49
96
109
Double rod
3.2
6.2
7.2
Air Cushion
Accessories
Air Cushion
(g)
12
Double action
Mounting bracket
10
20
25
183(203) 258(286)
11.8
18.4
C85LA
20
40
95
C85LB
55
105
210
C85F
12
25
90
C85T
20
50
75
C85C
20
40
KJD
17
25
45
70
GKM-
10
20
50
100
Floating joint
JA--
10
20
50
70
85
Model Selection
Procedures
Symbol
Rubber Bumper
CP95
C95
0.08MPa
-X
(Made to Order)
Quick Reference
Guide
1.5MPa
C55
Air
Proof pressure
C85
Fluid
D(Auto Switch)
3-3
Series
C85
Construction
Double acting: Single rod
C858 to16 Rubber bumper (Disassembly is not possible)
!3 !1
!4 y q
r e
i !2 o
5A
!0
2A
5A
5B
2B
2C
!1
2D
Non-rotating rod
Standard 8
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
No.
q
2A
2B
2C
2D
e
r
5A
5B
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Head cover E
Head cover F
Head cover Y
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston A
Piston B
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
No.
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
Description
Bushing
Magnet
Bumper
Piston gasket
Tube gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Material
Sintered bronze
Quantity
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Remarks
(Switch style only)
(2 for switch style)
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
q r e !3 t !7 !5 !2 !4 !0
2A
!1
2B
2C
2D
!8
o y !6 !9 u
Non-rotating rod
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
No.
q
2A
2B
2C
2D
e
r
t
y
u
i
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Head cover E
Head cover F
Head cover Y
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Bushing
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Sintered bronze
3-4
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
No.
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
Description
Retaining ring
Retaining ring
Magnet
Wear ring
Bumper A
Bumper B
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Material
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Phenolic resin
Urethane
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Quantity
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Nickel plated
(Switch style only)
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Series
C85
Construction
!0
!8
!3 y !1
!5
Built-in magnet
!2 r e
!4
5A
!6
Standard
i !7 u
C55
5B
Quick Reference
Guide
5A
5B
y
u
i
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston A
Piston B
Bush
Cushion needle
Steel ball
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Sintered bronze
Stainless steel
Bearing steel
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
No.
o
!0
!11
!2
!3
!4
!5
Description
Cushion ring
Magnet
Mounting nut
Tube gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Check seal
!6
!7
!8
Needle seal
Rod end nut
Material
Brass
Remarks
Quantity
Carbon steel
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
2
1
Nickel plated
C76
q
w
e
r
Nickel plated
CP95
No.
C85
Component Parts
C95
@0
o y !6
@1 u
e !0 t
!7 !5 !2 !4 !8
@3
!3 @2
!9
Built-in magnet
Standard
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
!1
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Bushing
Retaining ring
Cushion ring
Magnet
Wear ring
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Copper alloy
Phenolic resin
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Hard chrome plated
No.
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
Description
Cushion valve
Cushion seal
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Cushion ring gasket
Cushion valve packing
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Self locking ring
Steel ball
Material
Carbon steel
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Quantity
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
Remarks
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
3-5
Model Selection
Procedures
Component Parts
Series
C85
Construction
Double acting: Double rod
C85WE 8 to 16 Rubber bumper (Disassembly is not possible)
!4
!2 !5
!3
!0
!1
Standard 10 to 16
r u i
Standard 8
Built-in magnet 8
Built-in magnet 10 to 16
Component Parts
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
Description
Rod cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston A
Piston B
Bushing
Magnet
Spacer
Material
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Sintered bronze
Remarks
White anodized
Quantity
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
Brass
No.
2 for 8
(Switch style piston)
(Switch style only)
o
!0
!11
!2
!3
!4
!5
Description
Bumper
Piston gasket
Tube gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Remarks
Material
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Quantity
Material
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Quantity
Remarks
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
(Switch style only)
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
!1
!4
!2 !0
Standard
!5
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
3-6
Description
Rod cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Retaining ring
Bumper A
Material
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Urethane
Quantity
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
Remarks
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
No.
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
Description
Bumper B
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Magnet
Series
C85
Construction
Double acting: Double rod
C85WE 10 to 16 Air cushion (Disassembly is not possible)
w e
!3
Standard
4B
4A
!5 i
Quick Reference
Guide
!0 !2 t !7 q !4 !1
C55
u !6 y
C85
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
4A
4B
t
y
u
i
Description
Rod cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston A
Piston B
Bushing
Cushion needle
Steel ball
Cushion ring
Material
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Sintered bronze
Stainless steel
Bearing steel
Brass
Quantity
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Remarks
White anodized
No.
o
!0
!11
!2
!3
!4
Description
Magnet
Rod end nut
Tube gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Check seal
!5
!6
!7
Needle seal
Mounting nut
Remarks
Material
Quantity
Carbon steel
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
1
2
2
2
2
2
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
2
1
Nickel plated
Quantity
Remarks
Nickel plated
C76
q
w
e
CP95
No.
!7 u t !3 !8 y
e w i r !4 !2 !1 !5
-X
(Made to Order)
@0 !0 !9 !6
C95
Standard
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
Description
Rod cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Retaining ring
Cushion ring
Magnet
Cushion valve
Material
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Copper alloy
Quantity
Carbon steel
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Remarks
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Hard chrome plated
Nickel plated
No.
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
Description
Cushion seal
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Cushion ring gasket
Cushion valve packing
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Self locking ring
Steel ball
Material
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
3-7
Series
C85
Dimensions
Double acting: Single rod
Rubber bumper/C85N Bore
Stroke
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
XC+Stroke
BE
BE
EE
EE
HR
EW d13
NA
ND
ND
KK
CD
G2
G1
WH
KV
SW
U
N2
KW
AM
N1
NA
H
S+Stroke
F
RR
Z+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
Stroke C
WA
G2
G1
Cushion valve
AM
HR
S+Stroke
N2
N1
Z+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
C85KN
Non-rotating rod (Rubber bumper only)
Wh
KK
8.00
AM
KA
8.00
f
Unit: (mm)
BE
C CD D
Bore AM
8 12 M12 X 1.25 4 4 +0.030
16.7
0
10 12 M12 X 1.25 4 4 +0.030
16.7
0
12 16 M16 X 1.5 6 6 +0.030
19.7
0
EE
EW F G1 G2 WA WB H HR K KA
KK
KV KW N1 N2 NA
M5
12
M5
12
M5
12 17
M5
12 17
G1/8
16 20
G1/8
16 22
ND(h8)
RR S SW U WH XC Z ZZ
28 10 4.2
M4
19
6 11.5 9.5 15 12 10 46
M4
19
9.5 5.5 38 14
5 6.2
M6
24
9.5 5.5 38 14
5 6.2
M6
24
13 8.5 44 17
6 8.2
M8
13 10.5 50 20
7
5
(5.5) (5.5)
8
6
(5.5) (5.5)
8
6
(5.5) (5.5)
11.5 9.5
(13.5) (13.5)
12.5 10.5
(12.5) (12.5)
12.5 10.5
(12.5) (12.5)
15 12 10
18 16 14
18 16 13
46
(53)
50
(54)
56
(56)
16 64 76 86
16
10
22
10
22
64
(71)
75
(79)
82
(82)
76
86
(83) (93)
91 105
(95) (109)
98 111
(98) (111)
Bore
KK
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
20
20
35
20
M8
71
84
96
109
134
159
25
22
10
35
20
M10 X 1.25
74
87
99
112
137
162
187
Item
I
Wh
Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
Bore
3-8
AM
20
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
51
64
76
89
114
139
25
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
52
65
77
90
115
140
165
Series
C85
Dimensions
SW
G2
G1
WH
KV
D
BE
BE
EE
EE
C55
NA
ND
ND
KK
Quick Reference
Guide
NA
HR
AM
N2
S+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
C76
N1
C85
KW
C85KE
Non-rotating rod (Rubber bumper only)
Wh
C95
KK
CP95
f
-X
(Made to Order)
AM
KA
8.00
8.00
G1
G2
HR
KA
KK
KV
KW
M5
12
28
10
4.2
M4
19
M5
12
28
10.5
4.2
M4
M5
17
38
14
6.2
N2
NA
ND(h8)
SW
WH
ZZ
11.5 9.5
15
12
46
16
86
19
11.5 9.5
15
12
46
16
86
M6
24
12.5 10.5
18
16
50
10
22
105
12.5 10.5
N1
M5
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
18
16
56
10
22
111
G1/8
20
44
17
8.2
M8
32
10
15
15
24
22
62
13
24
126
G1/8
22
50
20
10
15
15
30
22
65
17
28
137
Bore
AM
KK
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
20
20
35
20
M8
71
84
96
109
134
159
25
22
10
35
20
M10 X 1.25
74
87
99
112
137
162
187
Item
I
Wh
Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
Bore
20
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
51
64
76
89
114
139
25
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
52
65
77
90
115
140
165
3-9
Model Selection
Procedures
EE
D(Auto Switch)
Unit: (mm)
BE
C D
Bore AM
8 12 M12 X 1.25 4 16.7
10 12 M12 X 1.25 4 16.7
12 16 M16 X 1.5 6 19.7
Series
C85
LT
NH
UR
NH
UR
4-AB
XS
AV
TR
TR
US
US
LS+Stroke
Head cover E
Head cover N
XL+Stroke
AO
TF
UF
TF
UF
FBH13
FBH13
FT
FT
WL+Stroke
UR
UR
Head cover E
Head cover N
TM
TZ
TM
TZ
TDe8
TDe8
UW
TT
UW
Head cover E
TT
XZ+Stroke
XV
Head cover N
XC+Stroke
2-AB
LT
NH
CD
AE
AU
AO
TR
Head cover N
LG
Bore
AO
US
AB
LT
NH
LS
XL
TR JS14
XS
AV
UR
UR
FBH13
FT
TF
UF
WL
35
4.5
3.2
16
68
73
25
23.8
11
26
12.8
22
4.5
3.2
30
40
12.8
65.2
10
35
4.5
3.2
16
68(75)
73(80)
25
23.8
11
26
12.8
22
4.5
3.2
30
40
12.8
65.2(72.2)
12
42
5.5
20
78(82)
86(90)
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
76(80)
16
42
5.5
20
84(84)
92(92)
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
82(82)
20
54
6.6
25
96
103
40
36
17
42
19
40
6.6
50
66
19
91
25
54
6.6
25
99
110
40
40
17
42
23
40
6.6
50
66
23
98
TT
UW
TD e8
TM
TZ
XV
XZ
20
26
38
13
65
10
20
26
38
13
65(72)
12
25
38
58
18
76(80)
16
25
38
58
18
82(82)
20
32
46
66
20
90
25
32
46
66
24
97
Bore
3-10
Unit: (mm)
Clevis
CD
+0.030
0
+0.030
4 0
+0.030
6 0
6 +0.030
0
8 +0.036
0
8 +0.036
0
AB AO AU TR
8.1 4.5 1.5 13.1 12.5
8.1 4.5 1.5 13.1 12.5
AE
LG
NH
LT
20
24
2.5
64
20
24
2.5
64(71)
XC
12.1 5.5
18.5
15
25
27
3.2
75(79)
12.1 5.5
18.5
15
25
27
3.2
82(82)
16.1 6.6
24.1
20
32
30
95
16.1 6.6
24.1
20
32
30
104
Series
C85
Dimensions
Double acting: Single rod
Rubber bumper/C85F, Y Bore
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
BE
HR
KW
Head cover F
NA
NA
Head cover Y
Head cover F
AM
N2
N1
C85
Head cover Y
C55
ND
C
NA
NA
K
HR
EE
EE
KK
SW
G2
G1
WH
KV
Quick Reference
Guide
Stroke
S+Stroke
H
Z+Stroke
C76
Wh
C95
KK
CP95
Stroke
C85KF, Y Bore
Non-rotating rod (Rubber bumper only)
f
-X
(Made to Order)
AM
KA
8.00
8.00
G1
G2
HR
KA
KK
KV
KW
M5
12
28
10
4.2
M4
19
M5
12
28
10.5
4.2
M4
M5
17
38
14
6.2
M6
M5
17
38
14
6.2
G1/8
20
44
17
8.2
G1/8
22
50
20
N2
NA
ND(h8)
SW
WH
11.5 9.5
15
12
46
16
74
19
11.5 9.5
15
12
46
16
74
24
12.5 10.5
18
16
50
10
22
88
M6
24
12.5 10.5
18
16
50
10
22
88
M8
32
10
15
15
24
22
62
13
24
106
10
15
15
30
22
65
17
28
115
N1
Bore
AM
KK
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
20
20
35
20
M8
71
84
96
109
134
159
25
22
10
35
20
M10 X 1.25
74
87
99
112
137
162
187
Item
I
Wh
Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
Bore
20
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
51
64
76
89
114
139
25
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
52
65
77
90
115
140
165
3-11
Model Selection
Procedures
EE
D(Auto Switch)
Unit: (mm)
BE
C D
Bore AM
8 12 M12 X 1.25 4 16.7
10 12 M12 X 1.25 4 16.7
12 16 M16 X 1.5 6 19.7
Series
C85
NH
NH
UR
UR
2-AB
AO
TR
TR
US
US
Head cover Y
Head cover F
AV
XS
UF
TF
TF
UF
FBH13
UR
UR
Head cover Y
Head cover F
FT
FBH13
TDe8
TZ
TM
TZ
TM
TDe8
UW
TT
UW
Head cover Y
XV
Head cover F
Unit: (mm)
Bore
3-12
Front foot
Front flange
Front trunnion
W
TT UW
TD e8
TM TZ XV
FBH13
FT
TF UF
35
4.5
3.2 16
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
10
35
4.5
3.2 16
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
12
42
5.5
20
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
16
42
5.5
20
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
20
54
6.6
25
40
36
17
42
19
40
6.6
50
66
19
32
46
66
20
25
54
6.6
25
40
40
17
42
23
40
6.6
50
66
23
32
46
66
24
AO US AB LT NH
TR JS14
XS AV UR
UR
Series
C85
Dimensions
Double acting: Double rod
Rubber bumper/C85WE Bore
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
Stroke
ND
KK
KW
AM
N1
N1
S+Stroke
C55
AM
NA
HR
Rail style (A)
NA
BE
EE
EE
ND
KK
Quick Reference
Guide
WH+Stroke
BE
SW
D
G1
G1
WH
KV
H+Stroke
ZZ + 2 X Stroke
C85
WA
WBWB
WA
G1
8 to 25
Band style (B)
or non-magnet
HR
Rail style (A)
CP95
C76
G1
N1
N1
S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 X Stroke
Wh
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
KK
K
8.00
AM
8.00
G1
WA
WB
HR
KK
KV
KW
M5
12
28
10
M4
19
M5
28
10.5
M4
19
M5
17 8(5.5) 9.5
5.5
38
14
M6
24
NA ND(h8)
S
SW
12
15
11.5
48{54} 7
12
48(53) 7
11.5(13.5) 15
16
52(54) 10
12.5(12.5) 18
M5
17 8(5.5) 9.5
5.5
38
14
M6
24
12.5(12.5) 18
16
G1/8
20
13
8.5
44
17
M8
32
11 15(17)
24
22
G1/8
22
13
10.5
50
20
M10 X 1.25 32
11 15(17)
30
22
N1
WH
ZZ
16
104{110}
16
104(109)
22
128(130)
52(54) 10
22
128(143)
62
13
24
150
65
17
28
165
Bore
AM
KK
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
20
20
35
20
M8
71
84
96
109
134
159
25
22
10
35
20
M10 X 1.25
74
87
99
112
137
162
187
Item
I
Wh
Stroke 1 to 50 50 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
Bore
20
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
51
64
76
89
114
139
25
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
52
65
77
90
115
140
165
3-13
Model Selection
Procedures
EE
D(Auto Switch)
Unit: (mm)
BE
C D
Bore AM
8 12 M12 X 1.25 4 16.7
10 12 M12 X 1.25 4 16.7
12 16 M16 X 1.5 6 19.7
Series
C85
UR
TRJS14
XS
LT
NH
4-AB
AV
LS + Stroke
US
AO
XL + Stroke
TF
UF
FBH13
FT
UR
TZ
TM
FDe8
TT
UW
XV
Unit: (mm)
Bore
Trunnion
TF UF
TT UW TD e8
LS
XL
35
4.5
3.2 16
70{76}
75{81}
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
10
35
4.5
3.2 16
70(75)
75(80)
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
12
42
5.5
20
80(82)
88(90)
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
16
42
5.5
20
80(82)
88(90)
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
20
54
6.6
25
96
103
40
36
17
42
19
40
6.6
50
66
19
32
46
66
20
25
54
6.6
25
99
110
40
40
17
42
23
40
6.6
50
66
23
32
46
66
24
AO US AB LT NH
3-14
Flange
W
UR FBH13 FT
TM TZ XV
3-15
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
C85
Series
How to Order
Single acting
Spring return/extend
C D 85 K N 16
50
Magnet
None
D Built-in magnet
Auto switch
mounting
A
B
Style
Standard
Non-rotating rod
(only rubber bumper)
Rail sytle
Band style
Mounting
Symbol
N
E
F
Y
Mounting
Basic integrated clevis
Double end
Boss cut
Boss cut - End port
Spring return
Spring extend
Bore size-Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)
8
10, 25, 50
10
12
16
10, 25, 50, 100,
20
150
25
Foot (1 pc.)
Foot (2 pcs. with
mounting nut 1 pc.)
Flange
Trunnion
Clevis
Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint
Floating joint
10
12
16
20
25
C85L10A
C85L6A
C85L25A
C85L10B
C85L16B
C85L25B
C85F10
C85T10
C85C10
KJ4D
GKM4-8
C85F16
C85T16
C85C16
KJ6D
GKM6-10
JA10-4-070
JA15-6-100
C85F25
C85T25
C85C25
KJ8D KJ10D
GKM8-16 GKM10-20
JA20 JA30
-8-125 -10-125
Replacement Parts
For Standard Cylinders
Bore (mm)
Kit No.
20
C85-20PS
25
C85-25PS
Kit No.
20
C85K-20PS
25
C85K-25PS
3-16
Note
Every set includes:
1 rod seal
1 packing retaining washer
1 retaining ring
Note
Every set includes:
1 rod seal
1 packing retaining washer
1 retaining ring
Series
C85
Specifications
8
10
12
16
20
25
10
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10 X 1.25
Ports
M5
M5
M5
M5
G1/8
G1/8
Air
Fluid
Proof pressure
1.5MPa
1.0MPa
0.18MPa
Lubrication
Piston speed
50 to 1500mm/s
Allowable kinetic
energy
Non-rotating accuracy
Non-rotating rod
0.23MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
0.18MPa
0.13MPa
C55
Spring extend
Quick Reference
Guide
Action
0.02J
0.03J
1 30'
1 30'
0.04J
0.09J
0.27J
0.4J
0 42'
0 42'
0/+1.4
0/+1
Stroke tolerance
C85
Spring return
Symbol
C76
Standard
Spring Return
CP95
100
150
4.02
4.41
3.43
4.41
2.45
5.69
6.28
4.90
6.28
3.53
12
7.16
6.57
7.16
5.79
7.16
4.41
16
13.2
12.1
13.2
10.3
13.2
7.45
13.2
7.45
13.2
7.45
21.6
18.6
21.6
16.7
21.6
11.8
39.2
9.81
39.2
9.81
27.5
25.3
27.5
22.1
27.5
16.7
47.1
13.7
47.1
15.7
10, 25, 50
25
Spring extend
Spring Extend
Bore
(mm)
Standard
stroke
(mm)
Unit: N
Spring force
10
25
50
100
150
Retracted Extended Retracted Extended Retracted Extended Retracted Extended Retracted Extended
5.30
3.92
5.30
3.14
5.30
2.65
5.98
4.81
5.98
4.02
5.98
3.53
12
6.57
5.59
6.57
4.90
6.57
4.51
16
14.7
11.3
14.7
9.22
14.7
7.85
14.7
7.85
14.7
7.85
39.2
33.0
39.2
23.5
39.2
9.81
39.2
9.81
39.2
9.81
47.1
40.4
47.1
30.4
47.1
13.7
47.1
13.7
47.1
15.7
10
20
25
10, 25, 50
3-17
C95
Retracted Extended Retracted Extended Retracted Extended Retracted Extended Retracted Extended
6.28
20
Spring return
50
4.41
8
10
Non-rotating rod
25
-X
(Made to Order)
Spring extend
10
D(Auto Switch)
Spring return
Standard
stroke
(mm)
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore
(mm)
Unit: N
Spring force
Series
C85
Construction
Single acting: Single rod
Spring return/C858 to 16-S (Disassembly is not possible)
!8 i r !9 q e !1 !2 !3 !0 !5 !7 t !6
Standard 10 to 16
2A
2B
!4 o
2C
y o u
2D
r q
Non-rotating rod
Standard 8
Built-in magnet 8
Component Parts
No.
q
2A
2B
2C
2D
e
r
t
y
u
i
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Head cover E
Head cover F
Head cover Y
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Piston A
Piston B
Bushing
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Brass
Sintered bronze
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
No.
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
Description
Magnet
Bumper
Return spring A
Return spring B
Spring guide
Spacer
Piston gasket
Tube gasket
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Material
Quantity
Urethane
Piano wire
Piano wire
Brass
Brass
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
(Switch style only)
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Standard 10 to 16
o !5
2A
o y
2B
2C
!8 i r q
Non-rotating rod
Standard 8
Component Parts
No.
q
2A
2B
2C
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
3-18
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Head cover E
Head cover F
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Piston A
Piston B
Bushing
Magnet
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Brass
Sintered bronze
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
No.
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
Description
Bumper
Return spring C
Spring guide
Spring seat
Plug
Spacer
Piston gasket
Tube gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Material
Urethane
Piano wire
Brass
Brass
Steel
Brass
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Quantity
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Series
C85
Construction
Single acting: Single rod
Spring return/C8520, 25-S
10B 10A
e !2 !5 t !9 !7 !4 !6 o i
2A
2B
2C
2D
Stroke50mm
Standard
10A
e !2 t !9 !7 !4 !6 !0
2A
@2
r @0 o y !8 @1 u !3 q
C55
r @0 o y !8 @1 u !3 q !5 !1
Quick Reference
Guide
@0 u @1 q r
Stroke>50mm
Standard
Built-in magnet
2A
2B
2C
2D
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
10A
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Head cover E
Head cover F
Head cover Y
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Bushing
Retaining ring
Return spring A
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Piano wire
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Zinc chromated
No.
10B
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
Description
Return spring B
Spring guide
Spring holder
Set screw
Wear ring
Bumper A
Bumper B
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Magnet
Material
Piano wire
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Phenolic resin
Urethane
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Zinc chromated
C76
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
(Switch style only)
CP95
No.
C85
Component Parts
2B
2C
Standard
@2
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
@0 r o y !8 @1 u q !5 t !9 !7 !4 !2 e !0 !1 !6 !3 i
@0 r o y !8 @1 u q
Built-in magnet
D(Auto Switch)
Non-rotating rod
Component Parts
Description
Rod cover
Head cover N
Head cover E
Head cover F
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Bushing
Retaining ring
Return spring
2A
2B
2C
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Piano wire
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Zinc chromate
No.
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
Description
Spring guide
Spring guide
Set screw
Wear ring
Bumper A
Bumper B
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Magnet
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Phenolic resin
Urethane
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Quantity
Remarks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
(Switch style only)
Model Selection
Procedures
No.
3-19
Series
C85
Dimensions
Single acting: Spring return
C85 NE Bore
Stroke S
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
XC + Stroke
WH
KW
HR
Head cover N
NA
Head cover E
Head cover N
ND
ND
K
KV
AM
NA
CD
HR
EW d13
Head cover E
BE
EE
G2
BE
NA
NA
SW
KK
U
N1
N2
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
RR
ZZ + Stroke
KA
C85KN, C85KE
Non-rotating rod
Unit: (mm)
BE
C
Bore AM
8 12 M12 X 1.25 4
10 12 M12 X 1.25 4
12 16 M16 X 1.5 6
16 16 M16 X 1.5 6
20 20 M22 X 1.5 8
25 22 M22 X 1.5 10
Bore
EE
EW
G2
HR
KA
KK
KV KW N1
4 +0.030
16.7
0
4 +0.030
16.7
0
M5
12
28
10
4.2
M4
19
M5
12
28 10.5
4.2
M4
19
6 +0.030
19.7
0
6 +0.030
19.7
0
M5
12
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
N2 NA ND(h8) RR SW
12
10 7
5.5 9.5 15
12
10 7
5.5 9.5 15
16
14 10
5.5 10.5 18
M5
12
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
5.5 10.5 18
16
13
8 +0.036
0.006 27.9
8 +0.036
0.006 33.4
G1/8
16
20
44
17
8.2
M8
32
11
15
15
24
22
G1/8
16
22
50
20
11
15
15
30
22
CD
XC
U WH
6
16
16
22
10
22
11
13
12 24
11
17
12 28
ZZ
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
1 to 50
46(52){56(62)}
64(70){74(80)}
76(82){86(92)}
86(92){96(102)}
10 46(50){56(60)}
12 50(53.5){60(63.5)}
64(68){74(78)}
76(80){86(90)}
86(90){96(100)}
75(78.5){85(88.5)}
71.5(75)
{92(95.5)}
87(90.5)
{118(121.5)}
82(85.5)
{92(95.5)}
97.5(101)
{118(121.5)}
113(116.5)
{144(147.5)}
113.5(117)
{134(137.5)}
129(132.5)
{160(163.5)}
105(108.5)
{115(118.5)}
111(114.5)
{121(124.5)}
16 56(59.5){66(69.5)}
20
62{87}
91(94.5)
{101(104.5)}
98(101.5)
{108(111.5)}
126.5(130)
{147(150.5)}
142(145.5)
{173(176.5)}
112
137
95{120}
145
170
115{140}
165
190
126{151}
176
201
25
113.5
138.5
104{127.5}
152.5
177.5
126{149.5}
174.5
199.5
137{160.5}
185.5
210.5
65{88.5}
3-20
Series
C85
4-AB
TR
XS
TR
AV
US
US
LS + Stroke
Head cover E
Head cover N
XL + Stroke
LT
UR
LT
NH
NH
UR
Quick Reference
Guide
AO
C55
W
FBH13
FT
C85
TF
FBH13
UF
TF
UF
FT
WL + Stroke
UR
UR
Head cover E
Head cover N
TDe8
UW
Head cover E
TT
TT
XV
XZ + Stroke
CP95
TDe8
UW
TM
TZ
TM
TZ
C76
Head cover N
AO
AU
TR
Head cover N
LG
Unit: (mm)
5
5
12
42 5.5 4
20
16
42 5.5 4
20
20
54 6.6 5
25
54 6.6 5
25 96{121} 146
171 103{128} 153
178
25 96{122.5} 147.5 172.5 110{133.5} 158.5 183.5
78(81.5)
86(89.5)
{88(91.5)}
{96(99.5)}
84(87.5) 99.5(103) 115(118.5) 92(95.5) 107.5(111) 123(126.5)
{94(97.5)} {120(123.5)} {146(149.5)} {102(105.5)} {128(131.5)} {154(157.5)}
76(79.5)
{86(89.5)}
97.5(101) 113(116.5)
82(85.5)
{92(95.5)} {118(121.5)} {144(147.5)}
32
32 14 33 18 30
5.5
40 52 18
32
32 14 33 18 30
5.5
40 52 18
40
36 17 42 19 40
6.6
40
40 17 42 23 40
6.6
50 66 19 91{116} 141
50 66 23 98{121.5} 146.5
166
171.5
Clevis
ZX
XC
CD AE AB AO AU TR LG NH LT
TT UW TD e8 TM TZ XV
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
65(71)
64(70)
4
4 +0.030
8.1 4.5 1.5 13.1 12.5 20 24 2.5 {74(80)}
26 38 13 {75(81)}
6 20
0
65(69)
64(68)
+0.030
4
4
8.1
2.5
24
26 38 13 {75(79)}
20
4.5
1.5
13.1
12.5
6 20
{74(78)}
0
76(79.5)
75(78.5)
6
6 +0.030
38 58 18 {86(89.5)}
8 25
12.1 5.5 2 18.5 15 25 27 3.2 {85(88.5)}
0
8
25
20
32
25
32
38 58 18
6 +0.030
12.1 5.5 2 18.5 15 25 27 3.2
0
8 +0.036
0
8 +0.036
0
46 66 20 90{115} 140
165
46 66 24 97{120.5} 145.5 170.5
( ): In case of auto switch style. { }: In case of non-rotating rod.
4 95{120} 145
170
4 104{127.5} 152.5 177.5
3-21
Model Selection
Procedures
8
10
WL
LS
XL
TR JS14 XS AV UR W UR FBH13 FT TF UF W
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
65.2(71.2)
68(74)
73(79)
{83(89)}
65.2(69.2)
68(72)
73(77)
40
26
3.2
30
25
11
22
35 4.5 3.2 16 {78(82)}
23.8
12.8
4.5
12.8
{75.2(79.2)}
{83(87)}
AO US AB LT NH
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
2-AB
LT
NH
CD
C95
XC + Stroke
Series
C85
Dimensions
Single acting: Spring return
C85 YF Bore
Stroke S
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
WH
KW
SW
HR
HR
K
NA
Head cover Y
EE
ND
KK
G2
BE
NA
NA
Head cover F
NA
Head cover Y
KV
AM
N1
Head cover F
Z + Stroke
N2
S + Stroke
KA
C85KF, C85KY
Non-rotating rod
Unit: (mm)
ND(h8)
SW
WH
5.5 9.5 15
12
16
5.5 9.5 15
12
16
24
5.5 10.5 18
16
10
22
M6
24
5.5 10.5 18
16
10
22
8.2
M8
32
10
15
15
24
22
13
24
10.2
M10 X 1.25
32
10
15
15
30
22
17
28
BE
EE
G2
HR
KA
KK
KV KW N1
M12 X 1.25
16.7
M5
12
28
10
4.2
M4
19
10 12
12 16
M12 X 1.25
16.7
M5
12
28
10.5
4.2
M4
19
M16 X 1.5
19.7
M5
17
38
14
6.2
M6
16 16
20 20
M16 X 1.5
19.7
M5
17
38
14
6.2
M22 X 1.5
27.9
G1/8
20
44
17
25 22
M22 X 1.5
10
33.4
G1/8
22
50
20
Bore AM
8 12
Bore
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
46(52){56(62)}
74(80){84(90)}
10
46(50){56(60)}
74(78){84(88)}
88(91.5){98(101.5)}
12 50(53.5){60(63.5)}
16 50(53.5){60(63.5)} 65.5(69){86(89.5)} 81(84.5){112(115.5)} 88(91.5){98(101.5)} 103.5(107){124(127.5)} 119(122.5){150(153.5)}
20
62{87}
112
137
106{131}
156
181
25
65{88.5}
113.5
138.5
115{138.5}
163.5
188.5
3-22
N2 NA
Series
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
LT
NH
UR
2-AB
AO
TR
TR
US
US
Head cover Y
Head cover F
AV
C55
NH
UR
XS
FB
C76
W
FB
CP95
UF
TF
UF
TF
C85
FT
UR
UR
Head cover F
C95
Head cover Y
-X
(Made to Order)
TD e8
TD e8
UW
TT
UW
Head cover Y
XV
Head cover F
Unit: (mm)
Bore
8
Front foot
TR JS14
Front flange
Front trunnion
TD e8
FBH13
FT
TF UF
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
3.2 16
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
AO US AB LT NH
5 35 4.5 3.2 16
XS AV UR
UR
TT UW
TM TZ XV
10
35
4.5
12
42
5.5
20
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
16
42
5.5
20
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
20
54
6.6
25
40
36
17
42
19
40
6.6
50
66
19
32
46
66
20
25
54
6.6
25
40
40
17
42
23
40
6.6
50
66
23
32
46
66
24
3-23
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
TZ
TM
TZ
TM
Series
C85
Dimensions
Single acting: Spring extend
C85 NE Bore
Stroke T
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
HR
EW d13
Head cover N
BE
EE
Head cover E
ND
U
KW
F
AM
NA
NA
Head cover E
EE
HR
ND
SW
NA
NA
KK
N2
N1
H + Stroke
Head cover N
S + Stroke
Z + 2 X Stroke
Rail style (A)
CD
XC + 2 X Stroke
WH + Stroke
KV
KV
RR
ZZ + 2 X Stroke
KA
C85KN, E
Non-rotating rod
Unit: (mm)
BE
C
Bore AM
8 12 M12 X 1.25 4
10 12 M12 X 1.25 4
12 16 M16 X 1.5 6
16 16 M16 X 1.5 6
20 20 M22 X 1.5 8
25 22 M22 X 1.5 10
Bore
EE
EW
HR
KA
KK
KV KW N1
4 +0.030
16.7
0
4 +0.030
16.7
0
M5
12
28
10
4.2
M4
19
M5
12
28 10.5
4.2
M4
19
6 +0.030
19.7
0
6 +0.030
19.7
0
M5
12
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
N2 NA ND(h8) RR SW
12
10 7
11.5 9.5 15
12
10 7
11.5 9.5 15
16
14 10
12.5 10.5 18
M5
12
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
12.5 10.5 18
16
13
8 +0.036
0.006 27.9
8 +0.036
0.006 33.4
G1/8
16
20
44
17
8.2
M8
32
10
15
15
24
22
G1/8
16
22
50
20
10
15
15
30
22
CD
U WH
6
16
16
22
10
22
11
13
12 24
11
17
12 28
ZZ
XC
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
64.5(70.5)
94.5(100.5)
82.5(88.5)
104.5(110.5)
10
64.5(68.5)
94.5(98.5)
82.5(86.5)
104.5(108.5)
12
70(73.5)
111(114.5)
95(98.5)
125(128.5)
16
75(78.5)
101(104.5) 127(130.5) 117(120.5) 143(146.5) 169(172.5) 101(104.5) 127(130.5) 153(156.5) 130(133.5) 156(159.5) 182(185.5)
20
87
112
137
140
165
190
120
145
170
151
176
201
25
88.5
113.5
138.5
149.5
174.5
199.5
127.5
152.5
177.5
160.5
185.5
210.5
3-24
Series
C85
4-AB
AV
XS + Stroke
TR
TR
US
US
Head cover E
Head cover N
LS + Stroke
AO
XL + (2 X Stroke)
C55
C85
TF
UF
TF
UF
C85N, C85E
Front flange, Rear flange: C85F10, C85F16, C85F25
FT
W + Stroke
FBH13
UR
Head cover N
FT
WL + (2 X Stroke)
TM
TZ
TM
TZ
TD e8
UW
Head cover E
C76
C85N, C85E
Front trunnion, Rear trunnion: C85T10, C85T16, C85T25
TD e8
UW
Head cover N
TT
TT
XZ + (2 X Stroke)
XV + Stroke
CP95
FBH13
UR
Head cover E
Quick Reference
Guide
LT
LT
UR
W + Stroke
NH
NH
UR
XC + (2 X Stroke)
2-AB
LT
AO
AU
Head cover N
TR
LG
Unit: (mm)
10
WL
LS
XL
TR JS14 XS AV UR W UR FBH13 FT TF UF W
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
12
42 5.5 4
16
42 5.5 4
20
25
Bore
AO US AB LT NH
32
32 14 33 18 30
5.5
32
32 14 33 18 30
5.5
40 52 18 96(99.5)
40 52 18 101(104.5) 127(130.5) 153(156.5)
54 6.6 5
20 98(101.5)
106(109.5)
40
36 17 42 19 40
6.6
50 66 19
116
141
166
54 6.6 5
40
40 17 42 23 40
6.6
50 66 23
121.5
146.5
171.5
Clevis
ZX
XC
CD AE AB AO AU TR LG NH LT
TT UW TD e8 TM TZ XV
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
4
4 +0.030
8.1 4.5 1.5 13.1 12.5 20 24 2.5 82.5(88.5)
26 38 13 83.5(89.5)
6 20
0
4
4 +0.030
8.1 4.5 1.5 13.1 12.5 20 24 2.5 82.5(86.5)
26 38 13 83.5(87.5)
6 20
12
25
16
25
20
32
6 +0.030
38 58 18 96(99.5)
12.1 5.5 2 18.5 15 25 27 3.2 95(98.5)
0
3.2
27
38 58 18 101(104.5) 127(130.5) 153(156.5) 6 +0.030
25
5.5
2
12.1
18.5
15
101(104.5)
127(130.5)
153(156.5)
0
46 66 20 115
16.1 6.6 4 24.1 20 32 30 4
140
165 8 +0.036
120
145
170
0
32
3-25
D(Auto Switch)
Model Selection
Procedures
NH
CD
AE
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
C85N
Clevis: C85C10, C85C16, C85C25
C85
Series
Dimensions
Single acting: Spring extend
C85F Bore
Stroke T
Without magnet, Built-in magnet
WH + Stroke
KW
SW
EE
BE
NA
KK
KV
HR
NA
AM
N2
N1
H + Stroke
S + Stroke
Z + (2 X Stroke)
KA
C85KF, CD85KF
Non-rotating rod
Unit: (mm)
BE
EE
HR
KA
KK
KV
KW
N1
N2
NA
SW
WH
M12 X 1.25
16.7
M5
12
28
10
4.2
M4
19
11.5
9.5
15
16
10 12
12 16
M12 X 1.25
16.7
M5
12
28
10.5
4.2
M4
19
11.5
9.5
15
16
M16 X 1.5
19.7
M5
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
12.5
10.5
18
10
22
16 16
20 20
M16 X 1.5
19.7
M5
17
38
14
6.2
M6
24
12.5
10.5
18
10
22
M22 X 1.5
27.9
G1/8
20
44
17
8.2
M8
32
10
15
15
24
13
24
25 20
M22 X 1.5
10
33.4
G1/8
22
50
20
10.2
M10 X 1.25
32
10
15
15
30
17
28
Bore AM
8 12
Bore
S
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
64.5(70.5)
92.5(98.5)
10
64.5(68.5)
92.5(96.5)
12
70(73.5)
108(111.5)
16
69(72.5)
95(98.5)
121(124.5)
107(110.5)
133(136.5)
159(162.5)
20
87
112
137
131
156
181
25
88.5
113.5
138.5
138.5
163.5
188.5
3-26
Series
C85
NH
UR
Quick Reference
Guide
LT
2-AB
AO
AV
C55
TR JS14
XS + Stroke
US
C76
CP95
TF
UF
C85
FT
FB
W + Stroke
C95
UR
-X
(Made to Order)
TD e8
TT
XV + Stroke
UW
Unit: (mm)
Bore
8
Front foot
TR JS14
Front flange
Front trunnion
TD e8
FBH13
FT
TF UF
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
3.2 16
25
23.8 11
26 12.8 22
4.5
3.2
30
40 12.8
20
26
38
13
AO US AB LT NH
5 35 4.5 3.2 16
XS AV UR
UR
TT UW
TM TZ XV
10
35
4.5
12
42
5.5
20
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
16
42
5.5
20
32
32
14
33
18
30
5.5
40
52
18
25
38
58
18
20
54
6.6
25
40
36
17
42
19
40
6.6
50
66
19
32
46
66
20
25
54
6.6
25
40
40
17
42
23
40
6.6
50
66
23
32
46
66
24
3-27
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
TZ
TM
Series
C85
High Temperature
C85 Mounting
N, E, F, Y
XB6
Bore size
Stroke
XB6
Low Temperature
C85 Mounting
N, E, F, Y
XB7
Bore size
Stroke
XB7
20, 25mm
Standard cylinder seals are replaced with special ones and other
modifications are made in order to enable the cylinder to operate at a high
ambient temperature (10 to +150C).
Standard cylinder seals are replaced with special ones and other
modifications are made in order to enable the cylinder to operate at a low
ambient temperature (40 to +70C).
Possible applications:
- Bore size 8 + 0 and 25mm
- Rubber bumper
- Without magnets (Auto switches cannot be used at high temperature.)
- Single rod - Double acting
- Double rod - Double acting (W)
Possible applications:
- Bore size 20 and 25mm
- Rubber bumper
- Without magnets (Auto switches cannot be used at low temperature.)
- Single rod - Double acting
- Double rod - Double acting (W)
Dimensions unchanged
Dimensions unchanged
Specifications
Specifications
Style
Applicable sizes
Action
Ambient temperature range
Cushion
Material
Grease
3-28
Air cylinder
8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25mm
Double acting
10 to 150C
Rubber bumper
Seal: Fluorocarbon rubber
Wear ring: Fluorocarbon resin
Fluoroplastics grease
Style
Applicable sizes
Action
Ambient temperature range
Cushion
Material
Grease
Air cylinder
20, 25mm
Double acting
40 to 70C
Rubber bumper
Seal: Low nitrile rubber
Wear ring: Fluorocarbon resin
Fluoroplastics grease
C85 Mounting
N, E, F, Y
XB9
Bore size
Stroke
XB9
20, 25mm
C85
Heavy-duty Scraper
C85 Mounting
Bore size
N, E, F, Y
XC4
Stroke
XC4
20, 25mm
Possible applications:
- Bore size 20 and 25mm
- Rubber bumper style only
- With or without magnets
- Single rod - Double acting
Possible applications:
- Bore size 20 and 25mm
- Rubber bumper style only
- With or without magnets
- Single rod - Double acting
- Double rod - Double acting (W)
Dimensions unchanged
Dimensions unchanged
Air cylinder
20, 25mm
1MPa
0.08MPa
Rubber bumper
NBR (SCB)
C76
Style
Applicable sizes
Max. operating pressure
Min. operating pressure
Cushion
Wiper ring
C85
Specifications
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
Construction
D(Auto Switch)
Air cylinder
20, 25mm
Double acting
10 to 50mm/sec
Rubber bumper
Model Selection
Procedures
Specifications
Style
Applicable sizes
Action
Piston speed
Cushion
C55
The cylinder does not generate any stick-slip phenomenon even at the
rated low speed of 10 to 50mm/sec. All strokes smoothly drive at a constant
speed.
Quick Reference
Guide
Low Speed
Series
3-29
Series
C85R
How to Order
Double acting
Single rod
C D 85 R A F 16
40
R2
R2
None
Built-in magnet
Style
Band style
Only 20, 25
Mounting
Symbol
Mounting
Boss cut
F
Boss cut-end port
Y
Bore size-stroke
Bore size (mm)
8
10
12
16
20
25
100
160
160
3-30
10
Replacement Parts
12
16
KJ4D
GKM4-8
KJ6D
GKM6-10
JA10-4-070
JA15-6-100
20
25
KJ8D KJ10D
GKM8-16 GKM10-20
JA20 JA30
-8-125 -10-125
Bore (mm)
Kit No.
20
C85-20PS
25
C85-25PS
Note
Every set includes:
1 rod seal
1 packing retaining washer
1 retaining ring
10
12
16
20
25
10
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10 X 1.25
Ports
M5
M5
M5
M5
G1/8
G1/8
Action
Air
Fluid
Proof pressure
1.5MPa
1.0MPa
0.1MPa
0.05MPa
0.08MPa
Cushion
Lubrication
Piston speed
50 to 1500mm/s
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
0.02J
0.03J
Stroke tolerance
0.04J
0.09J
0.27J
0.4J
0/+1.4
0/+1
C85
Space saving
Specifications
Weight
(g)
10
12
16
20
25
Basic wight
43
46
84
95
167
253
163
230
2.2
4.1
5.1
7.8
12.2
CP95
C76
C85
Series
Symbol
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
3-31
Series
C85
Construction
Double acting: Single rod
C85RA8 to 16 (Disassembly is not possible)
!3
!1
!2
!0
5A
Standard 10 to 16
2C
2D
5A
5B
Standard 8
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
No.
q
2C
2D
e
r
5A
5B
Description
Rod cover
Head cover F
Head cover Y
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston "A"
Piston "B"
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Brass
Brass
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
No.
Description
Bushing
Magnet
Bumper
Piston gasket
Tube gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
Material
Sintered bronze
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Quantity
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
Remarks
(Switch style only)
(2 for switch style)
C85R AB 20, 25
!6
i y
!4 u
!1 t !5 !3 !0
Standard
!2
2C
!7
2D
Built-in magnet
Component Parts
No.
q
2C
2D
e
r
t
y
u
i
3-32
Description
Rod cover
Head cover F
Head cover Y
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bushing
Retaining ring
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
White anodized
White anodized
White anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
No.
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
Description
Retaining ring
Wear ring
Bumper A
Bumper B
Piston gasket
Rod seal
Piston seal
Rod end nut
Magnet
Material
Carbon steel
Phenolic resin
Urethane
Urethane
NBR
NBR
NBR
Carbon steel
Quantity
Remarks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Nickel plated
(Switch style only)
C85
Series
Dimensions
Quick Reference
Guide
G2
G1
EE
2-LD
EE
K
AM
NA
N2
N1
Head cover Y
LX
S+Stroke
C55
NA
LH
NA
NA
KK
B
SW
ZZ+Stroke
Head cover F
Unit: (mm)
16 16
20
6 19.7
G1 G2
KK
M5
19
16
M4
M5
19
16
M4
M5
25
21
M6
26
M5
25
21
M6
26
LD
LH LX
N1
SW WH XB ZZ
N2 NA
14 23.5 9.5 15
58
12
74
14 23.5 9.5 15
58
12
74
10
16 29.5 10.5 18
67
10
16
88
10
16 29.5 10.5 18
67
10
16
88
Stroke B
C85
EE
C76
Bore AM B C D
8 12 16 4 16.7
10 12 16 4 16.7
12 16 20 6 19.7
G1
N1
EE
EF
2-LD
G2
CP95
SW
KK
LH
ND
WH
K
AM
ZZ+Stroke
Head cover F
Unit: (mm)
EE
G1 G2
G1/8
22
30
G1/8
22
36
KK
LD
LH LX
N1
N2 NA
21
29
15
24
25
29
15
30
M8
ND
S SW WH XB ZZ
0
20 0.033
76 13 10 22 106
0
26 0.033
79 17 14 26 115
Stroke B
D(Auto Switch)
Bore AM B C D
20 20 30.5 8 28
25 22 36.3 10 33.5
G1
EE
EE
G2
4-FF
ND
Model Selection
Procedures
K
NA
NA
AM
FX
N2
N1
F
S+Stroke
Head cover Y
ZZ+Stroke
Head cover F
Unit: (mm)
F
FX G1
Bore AM
20 20
C
8
28 G1/8 30.4
M5 Depth 9
22
25
10
M6 Depth 11
26
22
EE
FF
-X
(Made to Order)
Head cover Y
LX
N2
S+Stroke
C95
NA
NA
G2
KK
N1
N2 NA
22
30
M8
29
15
22
36
M10 X 1.25
29
15
SW WH
ZZ
24
ND
0
20 0.033
76
13
10
106
30
26
0
0.033
79
17
14
115
3-33
Series
C85
Dimensions
Rod Accessories
Single Knuckle Joint/DIN648-DIN24335
b3
b1
45
d3
l3
d7
d6
Bore
8
10
12
16
20
25
Model
KJ4D
KJ4D
KJ6D
KJ6D
KJ8D
KJ10D
Thread d3
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10 X 1.25
dh7
5
5
6
6
8
10
h
27
27
30
30
36
43
d6
18
18
20
20
24
28
b3
6.0
6.0
6.75
6.75
9
10.5
b1
8
8
9
9
12
14
l
10
10
12
12
16
20
Unit: (mm)
d7 0 l3
11 7.5 10
11 7.5 10
13 6.5 10
13 6.5 10
16 13 12
19 13 14
Bore
8
10
12
16
20
25
Model
Thread e
GKM4-8
M4
GKM4-8
M4
GKM6-12
M6
GKM6-12
M6
GKM8-16
M8
GKM10-20 M10 X 1.25
b
4
4
6
6
8
10
d
16
16
24
24
32
40
f
4
4
6
6
8
10
g
8
8
10
10
12
18
c
8
8
12
12
16
20
Unit: (mm)
j
a
8
6
8
6
12
8
12
8
10 16
12 20
Floating Joint/Series JA
In case of dimension without C
M
F
G
B
H
Unit: (mm)
M
Bore
Model
8, 10
12, 16
20
25
JA10-4-070
JA10-6-100
JA20-8-125
JA30-10-125
3-34
Nominal
Pitch
thread dia.
4
6
8
10
0.7
1
1.25
1.25
26
34.5
44
49.5
9
12.5
17.5
19.5
10
14
12
16
21
24
1.5
2
4.5
5
4
6
7
8
4
5
7
8
7
10
13
17
Maximum
screwed
depth P
5.5
7
8
9
Allowable
eccentricity U
Max. operating
tension and
compression
power (KN)
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.054
0.123
1.1
2.5
ISO Cylinder
Series
C85
Load voltage
Wiring
(output)
DC
Reed switch
3 wire
(NPN)
Grommet
200V
12V
Connector
Diagnostic indicator
(2 colour)
Yes
2 wire
24V
No
12V
5V,12V
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
12V
3 wire (NPN)
Diagnostic indicator
(2 colour)
With timer
With diagnostic output
(2 colour)
100V
5V,12V 100V
24V
C73
C80
C73C
C80C
Grommet Yes
Grommet
Water resistant
(2 colour)
C76
5V
Yes
No
AC
Yes
3 wire (PNP)
5V,12V
24V
2 wire
12V
Grommet
A72
A73
A80
A73C
A80C
A79W
F7NV
F7PV
F7BV
J79C
F7NWV
5V,12V
3 wire (NPN)
Connector
5V,12V
and Yes 3 wire (PNP) 24V
Grommet
2 wire
12V
0.5
()
3 5 None
(L) (Z) (N)
Applicable
load
A76H
IC
A72H
A73H
A80H
IC
Relay
PLC
IC
H7A1
H7A2
H7B
H7C
H7NW
H7PW
H7BW H7BWV
F79W
F7PW
J79W
H7BA
F7BA
H7NF
F7NT
F79F
H7LF
F7LF
3 wire (NPN)
4 wire
(NPN)
Rail mounting
Band
mounting Perpendicular In-line
Quick Reference
Guide
Electrical
entry
F79
F7P
J79
M9N
M9P
M9B
IC
IC
C55
Special function
Relay
PLC
IC
C85
Style
Indicator
IC
Relay
PLC
C95
CP95
C76
Auto switch
-X
(Made to Order)
Bore size
(mm)
Order No.
8
10
12
16
20
25
BJ2-008
BJ2-010
BJ2-012
BJ2-016
BM2-020
BM2-025
Bore size
(mm)
Order No.
8~25
BJ3-1
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
BJ2-
BM2-
BMA2-
3-35
3-36
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
SerieS
32, 40
4-1
Model Selection
Procedures
Air cylinders
C76
REPLACEABLE ROD
PACKING
MINIMIZED SIDE
CLEARANCE
(Head cover)
To realize the rational mounting and the saving
space by three or four different head covers.
Double
end type
Front
nose type
Front
nose type
Front nose
in line type
Series
Type
Standard
Non-rotating
C76
Direct
mounting
Mounting
bracket
Action
Double acting:
Single rod
Double acting:
Double rod
Single acting:
Spring return
Single acting:
Spring extended
Double acting:
Single rod
Single acting:
Spring return
Single acting:
Spring extended
Double acting:
Single rod
Bore size
(mm)
32 40
Rod clevis
Head clevis
Standard
variation
32 40
Gaiter
(Note2)
Head trunnion
4-2
Front nose
in line type
(Note1)
(Note 2)
Except for with
air cushion
Standard
(Air cushion)
Non-rotating
Double acting Double acting Single acting Double acting Double acting Double acting
Single rod
Single rod
Double rod
Double rod
Spring return Single rod
Spring
extended
Direct
mounting
Spring extended
Spring extended
C85
C55
Spring return
Quick Reference
Guide
Bore size
(mm)
32, 40
32,40
Type
P.4-4
Rod and
head foot
Flange
Trunnion
Rod foot
Rod and head
foot
Rod flange
Rod trunnion
Head trunnion
Rod clevis
Head clevis
Rod foot
Rod and
head foot
Rod flange
Rod trunnion
Head trunnion
Rod clevis
Head clevis
Standard/Mounti
ng nut, Rod end
nut,
Option/Single
knuckle joint
Double knuckle
joint (with pin)
Floating joint
P.4-18
P.4-4
Bottom side
mounting
Front nose
mounting
Rod foot
Rod and head foot
Rod flange
Rod trunnion
Head trunnion
Rod clevis
Head clevis
P.4-4
P.4-4
P.4-35
4-3
C76
Spring return/
Front nose
Double end
type
type
Front nose type
Front nose in
line type
Spring extended/
Double end
type Front nose
type
CP95
Double end
type
Front nose
type
Front nose in
line type
C95
Double end
type
-X
(Made to Order)
Spring return/
Double end
Double end
type
type
Front nose type
Front nose in
line type
Spring extended/
Double end
type
Front nose type
D(Auto Switch)
Page
32,40
Non-lubricated
Built-in
magnet
Mounting
bracket
32,40
Model Selection
Procedures
Mounting
(Head
cover)
32,40
Series
32, 40
C76
How to order
Double acting
Single rod
C D 76
Double acting
Double rod
C D 76 W
Single acting
Spring return
Spring extended
C D 76
K E 32
100 C
E 32
100 C
J J
100
K E 32
XB6
Magnet
Nil
D
A
B
None
Built-in magnet
Double rod
Type
Nil
K
Standard.
Non-rotating
(Rubber cushion
only).
Mounting
Mark
*E
** F
** Y
Mounting
Double end type
Front nose type
Front nose in line type
Gaiter
Nil
Without gaiter
J
Nylon tarpaulin one side
K
Neoprene cloth one side
* JJ
Nylon tarpaulin both sides
*KK
Neoprene cloth both sides
* In case of double acting/double rod.
40
C76F40A
S
T
C76F32B
C76F40B
Cushion
Trunnion
Clevis
Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint
Floating joint
C76T32
C76C32
KJ10DA
GKM10-20A
JA25-10-150
C76T40
C76C40
KJ12DA
GKM12-24A
JA40-12-175
Accessories
Bore
(mm)
Code number
Standard
Non-rotating
32
C76-32PS
C76K-32PS
40
C76-40PS
C76K-40PS
4-4
Action
32
C76F32A
Mounting bracket
Nil
C
Bore size (mm)
Spring return
Spring extended
1 In case of without auto switch, bore size: 32, stroke: 100, double acting/single
rod and double end type.
C76E32-100
1 pc.
Cylinder
2 In case of without auto switch, bore size: 32, stroke: 50, double acting/double
rod, double end type and rod and head foot mounting.
C76WE32-50
1 pc.
Cylinder
C76L32B
2 pcs.
Foot bracket
3 In case of with auto switch (band mounted type, 2 pcs.), bore size: 40, stroke:
100, double acting/single rod, front nose in line type and flange mounting.
CD76Y40-100-B
1 pc.
Cylinder
C76F40A
1 pc.
Flange mounting
D-C73L
2 pcs.
Auto switch
BM2-040
2 pcs.
For auto switch mounting band
4 In case of with auto switch (rail mounted type, 2 pcs.), bore size: 40, stroke: 50,
single acting/spring return, front nose type and trunnion mounting.
CD76F40-50S-A
1 pc.
Cylinder
C76T40
1 pc.
Trunnion mounting
D-A73L
2 pcs.
Auto switch
5 Non-rotating : In case of without auto switch, bore size: 32, stroke: 100, double
acting/single rod and double end type.
C76KE32-100
1 pc.
Cylinder
Series
C76
32
40
12
14
M10
M12
Ports
G1/8
G1/4
Action
Quick Reference
Guide
Specifications
Proof pressure
1.5MPa {15bar}
1.0MPa {10bar}
0.05MPa {0.5bar}
Ambient and
C55
Fluid
Gaiter
Symbol
Standard: double action
Rubber Cushion
Double rod
Air Cushion
Single rod
Air Cushion
Double rod
Neoprene cloth
Piston speed
Allowable Rubber cushion
kinetic
energy (J) Air cushion
Non-rotating accuracy
501500mm/s
0.65
1.2
1.07
0.5
2.35
0.5
CP95
Rubber Cushion
Single rod
Nylon tarpaulin
C76
Cushion
Lubrication
C85
fluid temperature
655 (725)
420
810
Additional weight
Single rod
16.8
26.6
Double rod
25.6
96.5
Mounting
bracket
C75F
C75F
110
240
200
455
15
165
25
305
70
105
100
165
A
B
C75T
C85C
Single knuckle joint
KJ
GKM
Floating joint
JA
D
-
70
C95
Single rod
Double rod
Accessories
160
( ): In case of air cushion
Model Selection
Procedures
40
-X
(Made to Order)
Basic weight
(g)
32
D(Auto Switch)
4-5
Series
76
C76
15
18
12
16
14
11
13
2B
2C
17
10
15
18
BUILT IN MAGNET
Parts List
Item
2A
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Part name
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Rod cover
Part name
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
2A
Head cover E
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
10
Magnet
Magnet
2B
Head cover F
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
11
Wear ring
Phenolic resin
2C
Head cover Y
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
12
Bumper A
Urethane
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
13
Bumper B
Urethane
Piston rod
Piston
Plain washer
Bush
Retaing ring
76
Carbon steel
14
Piston gasket
NBR
Aluminum alloy
Chromate
15
Rod seal
NBR
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
16
Piston seal
NBR
Sintered bronze
17
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Carbon steel
18
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Nickel plating
21
15
18
16
13
11
14
20
12
22
17
STANDARD EXECUTION
19
BUILT IN MAGNET
Parts List
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Part name
Material
Quantity
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
12
NBR
Head cover E
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
13
Rod seal
NBR
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
14
Piston seal
NBR
Piston rod
NBR
Piston
Plain washer
Bush
Retaining ring
Item
Part name
Carbon steel
15
Aluminum alloy
Chromate
16
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
17
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Sintered bronze
18
Steel ball
Carbon steel
19
Magnet
20
Wear ring
Phenolic resin
21
Retaining ring
Stainless steel
22
Piston gasket
NBR
Cushion ring
Copper alloy
10
Cushion valve
Rolled Steel
11
Cushion packing
NBR
4-6
Remarks
Nickel plating
Kanigen plating
Stainless steel
2
1
76
Series
C76
10
11
12
13
14
Quick Reference
Guide
15
C85
C55
STANDARD EXECUTION
BUILT IN MAGNET
Parts List
Item
Part name
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Part name
Material
Quantity
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
10
Bumper A
Plain washer
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
11
Piston
Rod seal
NBR
12
Piston seal
Bush
Sintered bronze
13
Piston gasket
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
14
Bumper B
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
15
Magnet
Piston rod
Stainless steel
1
1
NBR
NBR
Urethane
Chromate
C76
Urethane
Aluminum alloy
Remarks
1
(Switch type only)
CP95
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
76
20
STANDARD EXECUTION
D(Auto Switch)
19
BUILT IN MAGNET
Parts List
Material
Quantity
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Steel ball
Stainless steel
11
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
Retaining ring
Stainless steel
12
Piston rod
Carbon steel
NBR
13
Cushion ring
Copper alloy
Item
Part name
Remarks
Item
Part name
Cushion valve
Rolled steel
Kaunigen plating
14
Piston seal
NBR
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
15
Piston gasket
NBR
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
16
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Plain washer
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
17
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Rod seal
NBR
18
Cushion packing
NBR
Mounting nut
19
Magnet
10
Bush
20
NBR
Carbon steel
Sintered bronze
Nickel plating
Chromate
4-7
Model Selection
Procedures
C76
Series
C
XB
BE
H
R
WH
8
SW
EE
EE
BE
NB
2-Eh8
45
TDH9
KK
TW
KW
AM
1.50
FA
4-TC
1.50
N
KV
H
S+Stroke
ZZ+corsa
XC+Stroke
XB
BE
WH
H
R
FB
Cushion valve
SW
EE
EE
BE
NB
2-Eh8
45
KK
KW
TW
AM
1.50
FA
1.50
4-TC
N
KV
H
C 76KE
Non-rotating, Piston rod (Rubber Cushion Only)
Wh
KA
KK K
FB
ZZ+corsa
With Gaiter
S+Stroke
AM
8
I
Unit:mm
AM
BE
C D Eh8 EE FA FB G H HR K KA KK
32 20 M30x1.5 12 37.5 30 -0-0.033 G1/8 30 14 9 58 23.8 10 12.2 M10
40 24 M38x1.5 14 46.5 38 -00.039 G1/4 35 16 12 69 28.3 12 14.2 M12
Bore
KV KW N
NB S
38
7 17(19) 34.5 68
50
8 22(25) 42.5 89
SW TC TDH9 TW WH XB XC ZZ
17 M8x1 10 34.5 38 47 97 140
19 M10x1 12 42.5 45 57 122 174
With Gaiter
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
AM
KK
20
24
12
14
35
46
30
35
10
12
M10
M12
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
4-8
1~50
12.5
12.5
1~50
77
88
51~100
90
101
I
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
101~150
102
113
1~50
57
64
h
151~200
115
126
201~300
140
151
301~400
165
176
401~500
190
201
Wh
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
70
82
95
120
145
170
77
89
102
127
152
177
Series
C76
76E Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
A
LT
XS
TR
C55
NH
UR
TF
AU
LS+Stroke
AB
XL+Stroke
AO
C85
US
TZ
TZ
Port
XC+Stroke
C95
XB
CP95
Port
XB
CZ
CR
CG
4- AB
4-AB
CO
CE
CR
CG
Model Selection
Procedures
CU
CE
D(Auto Switch)
CO
CT
LT
LT
CH
CW
-X
(Made to Order)
NB
C76
TDe8
TDe8
Unit:mm
Rod/head trunnion
Rod foot (flange)
Rod clevis, Head clevis
AB AO AU LS LT NH TF TR UR US W XL XS NB TDe8 TZ XB XC AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT XB XC
32 7 7 14 96 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 120 48 34.5 10 -0.025
7
9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 97
-0.047 47.9 47 97
59.3
57
122
40 9 10 20 129 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 154 60 42.5 12 -0.032
9
12
52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 122
-0.059
Bore
4-9
C76
Series
C
SW
EE
H
R
KV
K
TD H9
TD H9
NB
NB
Eh8
45
TW
KK
KW
TW
AM
FA
1.50
2-TC
N
KV
H
S+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
With Gaiter
C 76KF
Non-rotating, Piston rod
Wh
KA
KK K
AM
8
I
Unit:mm
AM BE
C D Eh8
EE FA G H HR K KA
0
32 20 M30x1.5 12 37.5 30-0.033
G1/8 30 9 58 23.8 10 12.2
0
40 24 M38x1.5 14 46.5 38-0.039
G1/4 35 12 69 28.3 12 14.2
Bore
KK KV KW N NB
M10 38 7 17 34.5
M12 50 8 22 42.5
S
68
89
SW
TC
17 M8x1
19 M10x1
TDH9
TW
10 +0.036
34.5
0
12 +0.036
42.5
0
WH
38
45
XB
47
57
ZZ
126
158
With Gaiter
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
AM
KK
20
24
12
14
35
46
30
35
10
12
M10
M12
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
4-10
1~50
12.5
12.5
1~50
77
88
51~100
90
101
I
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
101~150
102
113
1~50
57
64
h
151~200
115
126
201~300
140
151
301~400
165
176
401~500
190
201
Wh
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
70
82
95
120
145
170
77
89
102
127
152
177
Series
C76
76F Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
LT
C55
NH
UR
TF
Quick Reference
Guide
AO
TR
AU
AB
XS
C85
US
CP95
TZ
C76
TDe8
Port
NB
C95
XB
-X
(Made to Order)
CZ
LT
D(Auto Switch)
CH
CW
CO
4- AB
CU
CE
CR
Model Selection
Procedures
CT
CG
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
AO
7
10
AU
14
20
LT
4
5
XB
47
57
4-11
C76
Series
C
EE
H
R
WH
K
SW
EE
Eh8
NB
TD H9
NB
45
KK
KW
KV
TW
AM
1.50
FA
2-TC
N
KV
H
S+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
With Gaiter
Wh
KA
KK K
C 76KY
Non-rotating, Piston rod
AM
8
I
Unit:mm
C D Eh8 EE FA G H HR K KA
0
12 37.5 30 0.033 G1/8 30 9 58 23.8 10 12.2
0
14 46.5 38 0.039 G1/4 35 12 69 28.3 12 14.2
Bore AM
BE
32 20 M30x1.5
40 24 M38x1.5
KK
M10
M12
KV KW N
38 7 17
50 8 22
NB S SW
TC
34.5 68 17 M8x1
42.5 89 19 M10x1
TDH9 TW WH XB ZZ
10 +0.036
34.5 38 47 126
0
12 +0.036
42.5 45 57 158
0
With Gaiter
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
AM
KK
20
24
12
14
35
46
30
35
10
12
M10
M12
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
4-12
1~50
77
88
51~100
90
101
101~150
102
113
I
1~50
12.5
12.5
1~50
57
64
h
151~200
115
126
201~300
140
151
301~400
165
176
401~500
190
201
Wh
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
70
82
95
120
145
170
77
89
102
127
152
177
Series
C76
76Y Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
LT
C55
NH
UR
TF
Quick Reference
Guide
AO AU
TR
AB
XS
C85
US
CP95
TZ
C76
Port
NB
C95
XB
XB
CZ
CO
CT
CU
CE
Model Selection
Procedures
LT
CH
D(Auto Switch)
CW
4- AB
CR
CG
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
AO
7
10
AU
14
20
LT
4
5
XB
47
57
4-13
C76
Series
C
XB
G
EE
EE
WH+Stroke
K
BE
TD H9
NB
D
C
45
XB+Stroke
WH
2-Eh8
H
R
K
SW
KK
AM
TW
KW
FA
1.50
4-TC
1.50
S+Stroke
FA
AM
H+Stroke
ZZ+2 x Stroke
H
R
cushion valve
WA
WA
45
With Gaiter
Wh
KK K
AM
8
I
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AM BE
C D Eh8 EE FA G H HR K
20 M30x1.5 12 37.5 300-0.033 G1/8 30 9 58 23.8 10
24 M38x1.5 14 46.5 38 0-0.039 G1/4 35 12 69 28.3 12
KK KV WB KW N NB S SW TC TDH9 TW WH
38 11 7 17(19) 34.5 68 17 M8x1 10+0.036
34.5 38
-0
M12
50 13 8 22(25) 42.5 89 19 M10x1 12+0.043
42.5 45
-0
M10
XB
47
57
ZZ WA
184 15.3
227 20
With Gaiter
Item
Bore
Stroke
32
40
AM
KK
20
24
12
14
35
46
30
35
10
12
M10
M12
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
4-14
1~50
12.5
12.5
1~50
77
88
51~100
90
101
I
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
101~150
102
113
1~50
57
64
h
151~200
115
126
201~300
140
151
301~400
165
176
401~500
190
201
Wh
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~300 301~400 401~500
70
82
95
120
145
170
77
89
102
127
152
177
Series
C76
76E Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
LT
AU
XS
TR
C55
NH
UR
TF
Quick Reference
Guide
XT+Stroke
LS+Stroke
AB
XL+Stroke
AO
C85
US
CP95
TZ
C76
TDe8
Port
NB
XC+Stroke
XB
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
XB
CZ
CO
CT
4- AB
CR
CG
Model Selection
Procedures
CU
CE
D(Auto Switch)
LT
CH
CW
Unit:mm
Rod trunnion
Clevis
Rod floot (flange)
AB AO AU LS LT NH TF TR UR US W XL XS XT NB TDe8 TZ XB XC AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT XB XC
32 7 7 14 96 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 120 48 24 34.5 10 -0.025
7
9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 97
-0.047 47.9 47 97
59.3
57
122
40 9 10 20 129 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 150 60 25 42.5 12 -0.032
9
12
52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 122
-0.059
Bore
4-15
C76
Series
Accessories/Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint/DIN648
Unit: mm
Bore Size
32
40
Model
KJ10DA
KJ12DA
Thread d3 dH71 h d6 b3 b1 l d7 0 l3
M10
10 43 20 10.5 14 20 19 13 14
M12
12 50 30 12 16 22 22 13 16
Unit: mm
Bore Size
32
40
Model
GKM10-20A
GKM12-24A
Thread e
M10
M12
b
10
12
d
40
48
f
10
12
g
18
23
c
20
24
j
12
15
a
20
24
Floating-Joint/Series JA
JA2540
Unit: mm
M
Bore Size
Model
Nominal
thread dia.
32
40
4-16
JA25-10-150
JA40-12-175
10
12
Maximum
screwed
depth P
Allowable
eccentricity U
24
31
5
6
8
11
8
11
17
22
9
13
0.5
0.75
Pitch
1.5
1.75
49.5
60
19.5
20
Max. operating
tension and
compression
power kgf (KN)
250 (2.5)
440 (4.4)
Double acting
C76
Series
D-C73L
D-C80L
D-H7A1L
D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
D-C73CN
D-C80CN
D-H7CN
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
D-H7NWL
D-H7PWL
D-H7BWL
D-A73L
D-A80L
D-F7PL
D-F79L
D-J79L
D-A73HL
D-A80HL
D-J79CN
D-A73CN
D-A80CN
C76
C85
CP95
D-F7PWL
D-F79WL
D-J79WL
Auto switch
model
D-C73L, D-C80L
D-H7A1L, D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
D-C73CN,
D-C80CN,
D-H7CN
D-H7NWL,
D-H7PWL,
D-H7BWL
15
50
15
65
15
10
15+45 ( n-2
2 ) 65+50(n-2)
(n=2,4...)
10
n-2
2 )
15+45 (
75+55(n-2)
(n=2,4...)
75
1pc.
15+45 ( n-2
2 ) 50+45(n-2)
(n=2,4...)
Auto switch
model
D-A73L, D-A80L,
D-A73HL, D-A80HL,
D-A73CN, D-A80CN,
D-F79L, D-J79L,
D-F7PL, D-J79CN
D-A79WL, D-F79WL,
D-F7PWL
D-J79WL
10
10
n-2
15+35 ( 2 )
(n=2,4...)
15
15+35 ( 2 )
(n=2,4...)
D-H7CN
D-H7NWL
D-H7PWL
D-H7BWL
1pc.
n-2
Reed type
10
Bore
D-C73L
D-C73CN
D-A73L
D-A73HL
D-A73CN
(mm)
D-C80L
D-C80CN
D-A80L
D-A80HL
D-A80CN
D-A79WL
Hs
D-H7A1L
D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
32
28.5
31
30.3
27.8
36.2
5 31.6 7
40
13
12 32.5
13
12
35
14
13
34.8
14
13
32.3 14
13
40.7 11
Hs
6 28.5 7
10 36.1 12 11 32.5 12
Hs
Hs
D-F79L
D-F7PL
D-J79L
D-J79CN
Hs
D-F79WL
D-F7PWL
D-J79WL
Hs
Hs
30
8 34.6 13
12 30
13 39.1 18
17 34.5
4-17
D(Auto Switch)
Unit:mm
Model Selection
Procedures
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
D-A79WL
C76
Series
32
40
12
14
M10
M12
Ports
G1/8
G1/4
Action
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5MPa {15bar}
1.0MPa {10bar}
Ambient and
-2080C (Built-in magnet type: -1060C)
fluid temperature
Lubrication
Piston speed
Allowable kinetic
energy (J)
Non-rotating
accuracy
Symbol
Standard
Spring return
1.2
0.5
0.5
Spring extended
Spring extended
Bore
size
(N)
Standard
Spring force
stroke
(mm)
10
25
50
100
150
200
Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting
position position position position position position position position position position position position
250
Extended Retracting
position
position
10, 25,
32
50, 100
53.9 48.8 53.9 41.2 53.9 28.4 66.7 19.6 66.7 18.1 66.7 19.6
76.5
23.5
150, 200
10, 25
40
50, 100
150, 200
250
Spring extended
Bore
size
(N)
Standard
stroke
(mm)
Spring force
10
25
50
100
150
200
Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting Extended Retracting
position position position position position position
position
position
position position position
position
250
Extended Retracting
position position
10, 25,
32
50, 100
66.7 56.3 66.7 40.7 66.7 14.7 66.7 19.6 66.7 18.1 66.7 19.6
76.5
23.5
150, 200
10, 25
40
50, 100
150, 200
250
4-18
50
C76
Series
Weigh table
Accessories
32
40
10 stroke
365
700
25 stroke
390
735
50 stroke
430
805
Basic
100 stroke
685
1185
weight
150 stroke
860
1450
200 stroke
1025
1705
250 stroke
1960
C76FOA
110
200
Mounting
C76FOB
240
455
bracket
C76TO
15
25
C76CO
165
305
KJOD
70
105
GKMO-OA
100
165
JAO-O-O
70
160
Floating joint
C55
Bore size
Quick Reference
Guide
(g)
C85
Spring Return
C76
Accessories
40
10 stroke
430
795
25 stroke
455
835
50 stroke
495
900
Basic
100 stroke
640
1125
weight
150 stroke
795
1360
200 stroke
940
1585
250 stroke
1720
C76FOA
110
200
Mounting
C76FOB
240
455
bracket
C76TO
15
25
305
C76CO
165
KJODA
70
105
GKMO-OA
100
165
JAO-O-O
70
160
Floating joint
C95
32
-X
(Made to Order)
Bore size
CP95
(g)
D(Auto Switch)
Spring Extended
Model Selection
Procedures
4-19
C76
Series
16
17
10
12
11
15
14
13
Front nose
type
Standard
2A
2B
2D
18
Front nose
in line type
Built-in magnet
Parts List
Item
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Part name
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Rod cover
Part name
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
Return spring A
Steel wire
Chromate
2A
Head cover E
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
10
Return spring B
2B
Head cover F
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
11
Spring holder
2D
Head cover Y
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
12
Bumper A
Urethane
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
13
Bumper B
Urethane
Piston rod
Carbon steel
14
Piston gasket
NBR
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromate
15
Piston seal
NBR
Bush
Sintered bronze
16
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
17
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Wear ring
Phenolic resin
18
Magnet
Steel wire
Chromate
Carbon steel
Zinc chromate
18
21
13
15
11
Standard
10
12
19
14
17
16
2A
Front nose
type
2B
2D
22
Built-in magnet
Front nose
in line type
Parts List
Material
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Material
Quantity
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
13
Set screw
Carbon steel
2A
Head cover E
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
14
Wear ring
Phenolic resin
2B
Head cover F
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
15
Bumper A
Urethane
2D
Head cover Y
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
16
Bumper B
Urethane
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
17
Piston gasket
NBR
Piston rod
Carbon steel
18
Rod seal
NBR
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromate
19
Piston seal
NBR
Plain washer
Bush
8
9
10
Return spring
Steel wire
Chromate
11
Spring guide
Aluminum alloy
Zinc chromate
12
Spring holder
Aluminum alloy
Item
1
4-20
Part name
Part name
Remarks
Carbon steel
20
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Sintered bronze
21
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
22
Magnet
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Chromate
17
20
14
18
13
16
11
10
15
12
2A
2B
21
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
19
76
C76
Series
Front nose
in line type
Built-in magnet
C85
Standard
Parts List
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
13
Wear ring
2A
Head cover E
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
14
Bumper A
Urethane
2B
Head cover F
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
15
Bumper B
Urethane
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
16
Piston gasket
NBR
Rod seal
NBR
Plain washer
Bush
Retaining ring
Remarks
Carbon steel
17
Aluminum alloy
Chromate
18
Piston seal
NBR
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
19
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
20
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
21
Magnet
Sintered bronze
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Zinc chromate
Return spring
Steel wire
10
Spring guide
Aluminium alloy
11
Spring holder
Aluminium alloy
12
Set screw
Carbon steel
CP95
Piston
Quantity
C95
Piston rod
Material
Phenolic resin
-X
(Made to Order)
Part name
D(Auto Switch)
Part name
Model Selection
Procedures
C76
Material
Rod cover
Item
4-21
Series
C
C76
XC+Stroke
XB
BE
H
R
WH
8
SW
BE
Eh8
NB
2-Eh8
45
KK
TDH9
TW
EE
KW
AM
FA
1.50
4-TC
1.50
N
KV
H
S+Stroke
FB
ZZ+Stroke
KA
C 76KE
Non-rotating, Piston rod
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AM
BE
C D Eh8 EE FA
20 M30x1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30
24 M38x1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/8 35
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
G
9
12
H HR K KA
58 23.8 10 12.2
69 28.3 12 14.2
S
1~50 51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
1~50
51~100
68 (93) 118
143
168
97 (122) 147
89 (114) 139
164
189
214 122 (147) 172
( ): in case of non-rotating
4-22
FB
14
16
KK
M10
M12
KV KW
38
7
50
8
N
17
22
NB
34.5
42.5
SW
17
19
TC
M8x1
M10x1
TDH9 TW WH XB
10
34.5 38 47
12
42.5 45 57
XC
ZZ
101~150 151~200 201~250 1~50 51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
172
197
140 (165) 190
215
240
197
222
247 174 (199) 224
249
274
299
Series
C76
76E Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
A
LT
XS
TR
C55
NH
UR
TF
WH
Quick Reference
Guide
AU
LS+Stroke
AB
XL+Stroke
AO
C85
US
CP95
Port
Port
XC+Stroke
C95
XB
-X
(Made to Order)
XB
CZ
LT
CO
CT
4-AB
4- AB
CR
CE
CU
D(Auto Switch)
LT
CH
CW
CO
CE
CR
CG
CG
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
AO
7
10
AU
14
20
Item
32
40
UR US W
49 66 34
58 80 40
Rod clevis
Rod trunnion
XS NB TDe8 TZ XB AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ
49.9 47 7
9 41 35 4
24 20 46.8 13 57.9
48 34.5 10 -0.025
-0.047
62.3 57 9 12 52 40 3
30 28 58.2 17 72.3
60 42.5 12 -0.032
-0.059
Stroke
Bore
1~50
96
129
120
154
146
179
171
204
196
229
254
Head trunnion
XC
170
204
195
229
220
254
279
97
122
172
197
197
222
XB
47
57
Head clevis
XC
147
172
LT
4
5
247
97
122
147
172
172
197
197
222
247
4-23
Model Selection
Procedures
NB
TZ
TZ
NB
C76
TDe8
Series
C
C76
XB
BE
WH
SW
TD H9
NB
TD H9
TW
TW
45
NB
D
Eh8
EE
H
R
KV
KK
KW
AM
1.50
FA
2-TC
N
KV
H
S+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
KA
C 76KF
Non-rotating, Piston rod
Unit:mm
Bore AM
32
40
20
24
BE
Eh8
M30x1.5
M38x1.5
12
14
37.5
46.5
30
38
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
EE
KA
KK
9
12
58
69
10 12.2
12 14.2
M10
M12
S
1~50 51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250 1~50 51~100
68 (93)
118
143
168
126 (151)
176
89 (114) 139
164
189
214 158 (183) 208
( ): in case of non-rotating
4-24
FA
G1/8 30
G1/4 35
KV KW HR
38
50
7
8
23.8
28.3
NB
SW
TC
17
22
34.5
42.5
17
19
M8x1
10
34.5 38
47
M10x1
12
42.5 45
57
ZZ
101~150 151~200 201~250
201
226
233
258
283
TDH9
TW WH XB
Series
C76
76F Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
A
LT
C55
NH
UR
TF
AO AU
TR
AB
XS
C85
US
CP95
TZ
C76
TDe8
NB
C95
XB
-X
(Made to Order)
LT
CH
D(Auto Switch)
CW
CU
CE
4- AB
Model Selection
Procedures
CO
CT
CR
CG
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
AO
7
10
AU
14
20
Rod clevis
Rod foot (flange)
Rod trunnion
LT NH TF TR UR US W XS NB TDe8 TZ XB AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT XB
49.9 47 7
9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47
4
28 28 52 49 66 34 48 34.5 10 -0.025
-0.047
62.3 57
9
12
52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57
5
33 30 60 58 80 40 60 42.5 12 -0.032
-0.059
4-25
Series
C
C76
XB
BE
G
H
R
WH
SW
EE
Eh8
TD H9
TD H9
NB
45
NB
TW
TW
KV
KV
KK
KW
AM
1.50
FA
2-TC
N
S+Stroke
ZZ+Stroke
KA
C 76KY
Non-rotating, Piston rod
Unit:mm
Bore AM
32
40
20
24
BE
Eh8
M30x1.5
M38x1.5
12
14
37.5
46.5
30
38
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
EE
KA
KK
9
12
58
69
10 12.2
12 14.2
M10
M12
S
1~50 51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250 1~50 51~100
68 (93) 118
143
168
( ): in case of non-rotating
4-26
FA
G1/8 30
G1/4 35
KV KW
38
50
7
8
HR
NB SW
23.8
28.3
17
22
34.5
42.5
ZZ
101~150 151~200 201~250
201
226
233
258
283
17
19
TC
TDH9
M8x1
10
34.5 38
TW WH XB
47
M10x1
12
42.5 45
57
Series
C76
76Y Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
LT
C55
NH
UR
TF
Quick Reference
Guide
AO AU
TR
AB
XS
C85
US
CP95
TZ
C76
TDe8
NB
C95
XB
XB
CZ
CO
CT
CU
CE
Model Selection
Procedures
LT
CH
D(Auto Switch)
CW
4- AB
CR
CG
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
AO
7
10
AU
14
20
LT
4
5
XB
47
57
4-27
Series
C
C76
EE
WH+Stroke
K
45
2-NEh8
BE
NB
TD H9
SW
KK
KW
TW
AM
1.50
FA
4-TC
1.50
N
KV
H+Stroke
S+Stroke
FB
ZZ+2 x Stroke
KA
C 76KE
Non-rotating, Piston rod
Unit:mm
Bore AM
32
20
BE
C D Eh8
EE FA FB G
-0
M30x1.5 12 37.5 30 - 0.033 G1/8 30 14 9
40
24
M38x1.5
14
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
4-28
1~50
93
114
46.5 38
-0
0.039
G1/4 35 16 12
S
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
118
143
168
139
164
189
214
H K KA
58 10 12.2
KK
M10
69 12 14.2
M12
1~50
122
147
51~100
147
172
KV KW
38
7
50
HR
23.8
N
17
NB SW
34.5 17
TC
M8x1
TDH9
10
TW WH XB
34.5 38 47
28.3
22
42.5
M10x1
12
42.5 45 57
XC
101~150 151~200 201~250
172
197
197
222
247
19
1~50
165
199
ZZ
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
190
215
240
224
249
274
299
Series
C76
76E Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
LT
AU
XS+Stroke
LS+Stroke
AB
XL+2 x Stroke
AO
C85
US
TZ
TZ
TDe8
Port
Port
XC+2XStroke
XB+Stroke
CP95
NB
C76
TR
C55
NH
UR
TF
WH+Stroke
XB+Stroke
CE
CO
CR
CG
4- AB
4- AB
CE
CO
CR
CG
Unit:mm
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
1~50
121
154
Stroke
32
40
145
170
195
220
179
204
229
254
179
204
229
254
279
Item
Bore
rod
TF
28
30
1~50
122
147
1~50
122
147
LT
4
5
XB
47
57
Head trunnion
XC
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
147
172
197
172
197
222
247
Head clevis
XC
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
147
172
197
172
197
222
247
4-29
D(Auto Switch)
CT
CU
Model Selection
Procedures
LT
LT
CH
CW
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CZ
C76
Series
C
EE
SW
WH+Stroke
BE
TW
Eh8
TD H9
NB
NB
45
TW
KV
KK
KW
AM
1.50
FA
2-TC
N
KV
H+Stroke
S+Stroke
ZZ+2 x Stroke
KA
C 76KF
Non-rotating, Piston rod
Unit:mm
Bore AM
32
40
20
24
BE
Eh8
M30x1.5
M38x1.5
12
14
37.5
46.5
30
38
Item
Stroke
Bore
32
40
4-30
1~50
93
114
FA
KA
KK
G1/8 30
G1/4 35
EE
9
12
58
69
10 12.2
12 14.2
M10
M12
S
51~100 101~150 151~200 201~250
118
143
168
139
164
189
214
1~50
151
183
51~100
176
208
KV KW
38
50
7
8
HR
NB SW
23.8
28.3
17
22
34.5
42.5
ZZ
101~150 151~200 201~250
201
226
233
258
283
17
19
TC
TDH9
M8x1
10
34.5 38
TW WH XB
47
M10x1
12
42.5 45
57
Series
C76
76F Accessories
Dimensions with mounting brackets
LT
C55
NH
UR
TF
WH+Stroke
AO AU
TR
AB
XS+Stroke
C85
US
CP95
TZ
C76
TDe8
Port
XB+Stroke
C95
NB
-X
(Made to Order)
CO
CT
CU
Bore
32
40
AB
7
9
AO
7
10
AU
14
20
CE
Model Selection
Procedures
LT
CH
D(Auto Switch)
CW
4- AB
CR
CG
Unit:mm
Rod foot (flange)
Rod clevis
Rod trunnion
LT NH TF TR UR US WH XS NB TDes TZ XB AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT XB
49.9 47 7
4
28 28 52 49 66 34 48 34.5 10 -0.025
9 41 35 4
24 20 46.8 13 57.9
4
47
-0.047
62.3
57
5
33 30 60 58 80 40 60 42.5 12 -0.032
9
12
52
40
3
30
28
58.2
17
72.3
5
57
-0.059
4-31
C76
Series
Accessories/Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint/DIN648 - DIN24335
Unit: mm
Bore Size
32
40
Model
KJ10DA
KJ12DA
Thread d3 dH71 h d6 b3 b1 l d7 0 l3
M10
10 43 20 10.5 14 20 19 13 14
M12
12 50 30 12 16 22 22 13 16
Unit: mm
Bore Size
32
40
Model
GKM10-20A
GKM12-24A
Thread e
M10
M12
b
10
12
d
40
48
f
10
12
g
18
23
c
20
24
j
12
15
a
20
24
Floating-Joint/Series JA
JA2540
Unit: mm
M
Bore Size
Model
Nominal
thread dia.
32
40
JA25-10-150
JA40-12-175
4-32
10
12
Maximum
screwed
depth P
Allowable
eccentricity U
24
31
5
6
8
11
8
11
17
22
9
13
0.5
0.75
Pitch
1.5
1.75
49.5
60
19.5
20
Max. operating
tension and
compression
power kgf (KN)
250 (2.5)
440 (4.4)
Series
C76
D-C73CN
D-C80CN
D-A73HL
D-A80HL
C55
D-C73L
D-C80L
Quick Reference
Guide
C76
C85
D-A73CN
D-A80CN
Auto
switch
model
D-C73L
D-C80L
D-C73CN
D-C80CN
D-A73L
D-A80L
D-A73HL
D-A80HL
D-A73CN
D-A80CN
D-A79WL
Bore
size
10
10
32
40
32
40
32
40
32
40
32
40
32
40
1pc.
8(33)
13(38)
8(33)
13(38)
9(34)
14(39)
9(34)
14(39)
9(34)
14(39)
6(31)
11(36)
( ): In case of non-rotating
58
63
58
63
59
64
59
64
59
64
56
61
83
88
83
88
84
89
84
89
84
89
81
86
108
113
108
113
109
114
109
114
109
114
106
111
138
138
139
139
139
136
D-A73L, D-A80L,
D-A73HL, D-A80HL,
D-A73CN, D-A80CN
10
D-A79WL
15
7
12
7
12
1
6
8
13
8
13
5
10
8
13
8
13
9
14
9
14
9
14
6
11
n-2
10+35( 2 )
(n=2,4...)
15+35 ( n-2 )
2
(n=2,4...)
10
32
37
32
37
33
38
33
38
33
38
30
35
1pc.
Hs
57
62
57
62
58
63
58
63
58
63
55
60
82
87
82
87
83
88
83
88
83
88
80
85
107
112
107
112
108
113
108
113
108
113
105
110
137
137
138
138
138
135
28.5
32.5
31
35
29.3
33.8
30.3
34.8
36.2
40.7
31.6
36.1
4-33
D(Auto Switch)
D-C73L
D-C80L
D-C73CN
D-C80CN
Auto switch
model
Model Selection
Procedures
-X
(Made to Order)
Unit:mm
C95
CP95
D-A79WL
Series
C76
D-H7A1L
D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
D-F79L
D-F7PL
D-J79L
D-H7CN
D-J79CN
D-H7NWL
D-H7PWL
D-H7BWL
D-F79WL
D-F7PWL
D-J79WL
Unit:mm
10
D-F7PL, D-J79CN
(n=2,4...)
D-F79WL, D-F7PWL,
15+50 ( n-2 ) 15+35 ( n-2 )
2
2
15
D-J79WL
(n=2,4...)
(n=2,4...)
Auto
switch
model
D-H7A1L
D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
D-H7CN
D-H7NWL
D-H7PWL
D-H7BWL
D-F79L
D-F7PL
D-J79L
D-J79CN
D-F79WL
D-F7PWL
D-J79WL
4-34
Bore
size
1pc.
10
10
1pc.
5
10
10
Auto switch
model
Hs
32
7(32)
57
82
107
31
56
81
106
28.5
40
32
40
12(37)
7(32)
12(37)
62
57
62
87
82
87
112
107
112
137
137
11
6
11
12
7
12
36
31
36
61
56
61
86
81
86
111
106
111
136
136
32.5
31.5
35.5
32
5.5(30.5) 55.5(58.5)
80.5
105.5
4.5
5.5
29.5
54.5
79.5
104.5
25.5
40
10.5(35.5)
85.5
110.5
135
9.5
10.5
34.5
59.5
84.5
109.5
134.5
29.5
60.5
32
9(34)
59
84
109
33
58
83
108
30
40
32
40
14(39)
9(34)
14(39)
64
59
64
89
84
89
114
109
114
139
139
13
8
13
14
9
14
38
33
38
63
58
63
88
83
88
113
108
113
138
138
34.5
34.6
39.1
32
13(38)
63
88
113
12
13
35
60
85
112
28.5
40
18(43)
68
93
118
143
17
16
40
65
90
117
142
32.5
Series
C76
Quick Reference
Guide
32
40
12
14
M10
M12
Ports
G1/8
G1/4
Double acting/Single Rod
Fluid
C55
Action
Air
Proof pressure
1.5MPa {15bar}
1.0MPa {10bar}
0.05MPa {0.5bar}
Ambient and
Symbol
Cushion
Lubrication
C85
fluid temperature
Rubber cushion
None (Non lubricated)
501500mm/s
Allowable kinetic
0.65
1.2
CP95
energy (J)
C76
Piston speed
Construction/Part list
76R A 32 ~ 40
B
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Parts List
Quantity
Remarks
Item
Material
Quantity
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
11
Bumper A
Urethane
2B
Head cover E
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
12
Bumper B
Urethane
2D
Head cover Y
Aluminum alloy
White alumite
13
Piston gasket
NBR
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Piston rod
Carbon steel
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Plain washer
Carbon steel
Bush
Sintered bronze
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
10
Wear ring
Phenolic resin
Part name
Part name
Remarks
14
Rod seal
NBR
15
Piston seal
NBR
Chromate
16
Carbon steel
Nickel plating
Nickel plating
17
Magnet
Magnet
Nickel plating
4-35
Model Selection
Procedures
Material
Rod cover
Item
Series
C76
How To Order
Double acting
Single rod
C D 76 R A
F 32
100
Magnet
Nil
D
None
Built-in magnet
Type
A
B
Mounting
Mark
F
Y
Mounting
Front nose type
Front nose in line type
4-36
40
KJ10DA
KJ12DA
GKM10-20A
GKM12-24A
Floating joint
JA25-10-150
JA40-12-175
Bore
Code
number
32
C76-32PS
40
C76-40PS
(mm)
Note
Every set includes:
n1 rod packing
n1 packing retaining washer
n1 retaining ring
Series
C76
Bore
AM B C D EE G1
20 42.3 12 37.5 G1/8 22
24 52.3 14 46.5 G1/4 27
G2 H K
9 36 10
12 40 12
KK
M10
M12
L
LD
LH LX
47 9, 14 depth of counter bore 10 21 30
58.5 11, 17.5 depth of counter bore 12.5 26 38
N1 N2
29 17
38 22
NA ND
S SW WH XB ZZ
34.5 26 -00.033 80 17 16 28 116
42.5 32 -00.039 105 19 16 31 145
CP95
32
40
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Bore
32
40
AM
20
24
C
12
14
D EE
F
37.5 G1/8 42.4
46.5 G1/4 52.4
FF
M6 Depht 11
M8 Depht 14
FX
30
36
G1
22
27
G2
9
12
H
36
40
K
10
12
KK
M10
M12
N1
29
38
N2
17
22
NA ND S SW WH ZZ
34.5 26 -00.033 80 17 16 116
42.5 32 -00.039 105 19 16 145
4-37
Series
C
C76
Bore
32
40
AM B C D EE G1 H K
20 42.3 12 37.5 G1/8 22 36 10
24 52.3 14 46.5 G1/4 27 40 12
KK
M10
M12
L
LD
LH LX N1 N2 NA ND
S SW WH XB ZZ
47 9, 14 depth of counter bore 1
21 30 29 17 34.5 26 -00.033 80 17 16 28 116
58.5 11, 17.5 depth of counter bore 12.5 26 38 38 22 42.5 32 -00.039 105 19 16 31 145
Bore
32
40
4-38
AM
20
24
C
12
14
D EE
F
37.5 G1/8 42.4
46.5 G1/4 52.4
FF
M6 Depht 11
M8 Depht 14
FX
30
36
G1
22
27
H
36
40
K
10
12
KK
M10
M12
N1
29
38
N2
17
22
NA
ND
34.5 26 -00.033
42.5 32 -00.039
S SW WH ZZ
80 17 16 116
105 19 16 145
Series
C76
Accessories/Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint/DIN648
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Unit: mm
Thread d3 dH71 h d6 b3 b1 l d7 0 l3
M10
10 43 20 10.5 14 20 19 13 14
M12
12 50 30 12 16 22 22 13 16
Unit: mm
Bore Size
32
40
Model
GKM10-20A
GKM12-24A
Thread e
M10
M12
b
10
12
d
40
48
f
10
12
g
18
23
c
20
24
j
12
15
a
20
24
Allowable
eccentricity U
Max. operating
tension and
compression
power kgf (KN)
0.5
0.75
250 (2.5)
440 (4.4)
C76
Model
KJ10DA
KJ12DA
CP95
Bore Size
32
40
Floating-Joint/Series JA
Bore Size
Model
Nominal
thread dia.
32
40
JA25-10-150
JA40-12-175
10
12
Maximum
screwed
depth P
24
31
5
6
8
11
8
11
17
22
9
13
Pitch
1.5
1.75
49.5
60
19.5
20
4-39
Model Selection
Procedures
Unit: mm
M
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
JA2540
Series
C76
D-C73L
D-C80L
D-H7A1L
D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
D-C73CN
D-C80CN
D-H7CN
D-H7NWL
D-H7PWL
D-H7BWL
Unit:mm
4-40
Reed type
1pc.
n-2
15
50
15+45 ( 2 ) 50+45(n-2)
(n=2,4...)
15
65
15+50 ( 2 ) 65+50(n-2)
(n=2,4...)
10
15
75
15+50 ( n-2
2 ) 75+55(n-2)
(n=2,4...)
10
10
n-2
Bore
D-C73L
D-C73CN
(mm)
D-C80L
D-C80CN
Hs
D-H7A1L
D-H7A2L
D-H7BL
Hs
D-H7CN
A
Hs
D-H7NWL
D-H7PWL
D-H7BWL
Hs
32
7 28.5 8
31
6 28.5 7
B Hs
40
13
12 32.5 13 12
35
12
11 32.5 12
ISO Cylinder
Series
CP95
Quick Reference
Guide
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
5-1
Series
CP95
Model Selection
Execution
Standard Type
Non-Rotating
Piston Rod
With Lock
With Positioner
Low Friction Cylinder
Model
CP95 SB
CP95 SDB
CP95 KB
CP95 KDB
CP95 NB
CP95 NDB
CP95PB
CP95 PDB
CP95 QB -CA
-CB
CP95 QDB -CA
-CB
W = Double/Through Rod
R = Stainless Steel Piston Rod
K = Stainless &Acid-Proof Piston Rod & Nickel Plated Tie Rods
5-2
Options
Adjustable Piston Rod
Stroke End
Cushioning Standard
Hard Chrome W
Options
Standard
Series
CP95
Quick Reference
Guide
Z76 S
100 W
C55
Standard
Number of
auto switches
Mounting
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
Rod Specifications
C76
Load voltage
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Special function
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Reed
switch
Type
Grommet
DC
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
AC
100V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
12V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
1 2V
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
Vertical
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
Z76
Z73
Z80
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
Mounting
bracket
C95
CP95
Stroke (mm)
BMP1-032
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
BMP1-032
+
BMG2-012
Model Selection
Procedures
Order No.
32~100
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
-X
(Made to Order)
W
R
K
F
D(Auto Switch)
32
40
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
Bore size
Basic/Without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
B
L
F
G
C
D
Auto switch
C85
Built-in magnet
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
5-3
Series
CP95
Specifications
Bore size
32
40
50
Action
Fluid
1.0MPa
0.05MPa
Without magnet 10 to 70C (No freezing)
With magnet 10 to 60C (No freezing)
Lubrication
50 to 1000mm/s
+1.4
to 250:+1.0
0 , 251 to 1000: 0
Cushion
G1/8
Port size
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
Mounting
100
Air
80
1.5MPa
Proof pressure
ISO Symbol
Double acting
63
Double acting
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Max.
stroke
32
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
700
40
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
800
50
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
63
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
80
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
100
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
Bore size
32
40
50
Foot(1)
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 4) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 5) Piston rod nut is standard
5-4
63
80
100
Series
20
63
20
80
25
100
30
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
804
161
241
322
402
482
563
643
724
804
IN
691
138
207
276
346
415
484
553
622
691
300
OUT
1257
251
377
503
629
754
200
634
739
IN
1056
211
317
422
528
1963
393
589
785
IN
1649
330
495
660
825
OUT
3117
623
845
IN
2803
561
OUT
5027
IN
4536
OUT
7854
IN
7147
50
40
100
80
32
50
30
20
10
5
Weight table
Basic weight
63
950 1056
Bore
80
500
OUT
OUT
100
[kg]
Mounting type
Basic type B
Foot L
Front/rear flange F
Male rear clevis C
Female rear clevis D
Angled rear clevis E
Female rear clevis DS
Spherical bearing ES
Additional weight
per 50 mm stroke
Accessories
Piston rod ball joint KJ
Rod clevis GKM
Floating joint JA
32
0.59
0.16
0.20
0.16
0.20
0.16
0.17
0.18
0.11
40
0.87
0.20
0.23
0.23
0.32
0.22
0.27
0.27
0.17
50
1.44
0.38
0.47
0.37
0.45
0.42
0.45
0.46
0.28
63
2.00
0.46
0.58
0.60
0.71
0.52
0.64
0.55
0.40
80
3.37
0.89
1.30
1.07
1.28
0.94
1.37
0.97
0.67
100
4.45
1.09
1.81
1.73
2.11
1.40
2.05
1.33
0.89
0.15 0.23
0.22 0.37
0.015 0.20
0.26
0.43
0.26
0.26
0.43
0.26
0.60
0.87
0.9
0.83
1.27
0.9
100
300 500
1000 2000
C85
50
0.3
C76
16
900
0.2
CP95
40
12
IN
Quick Reference
Guide
OUT
(Unit : N)
C55
Theoretical Force
CP95
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Cylinder weight =
0.59+(0.11 x 100/50)=0.81kg
5-5
Series
CP95
Construction
A
Parts list
No.
Description
Head cover
End cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Cushion ring
Tie rod
Tie rod nut
Rod end nut
Snap ring
Bushing
Cushion valve
Cushion seal
Wear ring
Piston seal
Rod seal
Cylinder tube gasket
Cushioning valve seal
Piston/rod gasket
Magnet ring
Material
Die-cast aluminum
Die-cast aluminum
Die-cast aluminum
Hard chromed steel C45
Die-cast aluminum
Brass
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Steel nickel plated
Lead-bronze casting
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Elastomer
Antifriction material
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
32
40
50
63
80
100
5-6
Order No.
CS95-32
CS95-40
CS95-50
CS95-63
CS95-80
CS95-100
A'
Series
CP95
Quick Reference
Guide
CP95SB-Stroke
C85
C55
Stroke end
cushioning
STROKE
C76
STROKE
STROKE
STROKE
STROKE
Bore AM B D EE
PL
RT
I12
KK
SW G
BG I8
VD VA WA WB
WH ZZ
ZY E R I2
I9
32
40
50
63
80
100
13
14
15.5
16.5
19
19
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
6
6.5
8
8
10
10
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M16x1.5
M16x1.5
M20x1.5
M20x1.5
10
13
16
16
21
21
16
16
16
16
16
16
4
4
6
6
8
8
26
30
37
37
46
51
190
213
244
259
300
320
4
4
5
5
5
5
22
24
32
32
40
40
30
35
40
45
45
55
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
94
105
106
121
128
138
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
9
11.5
17
6.5
9
10.5
12
14
15
146
163
179
194
218
233
46
52
65
75
95
114
32.5
38
46.5
56.5
72
89
15
17
24
24
30
32
5-7
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
CP95SB-Stroke W
Series
CP95
[mm]
STROKE
STROKE
Mounting type F
Rear mounting
STROKE
Front mounting
Mounting type C
Mounting type D
STROKE
5-8
Series
CP95
Accessories
Rear double clevis D
E1 EW TG1 FL
L1
L2
d1
CD
MR
d2
R1 E2 UB
CB
45
51
64
74
94
113
5
5
5
5
5
5
12
15
15
20
20
25
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
10
10
30
35
40
45
45
55
10
12
12
16
16
20
9.5
12
12
16
16
20
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
6.5
6.5
8.5
8.5
11
12
26
28
32
40
50
60
26
28
32
40
50
60
32.5
38
46.5
56.5
72
89
22
25
27
32
36
41
48
45
56
52
64
60
75
70
95
90
115 110
C85
32
40
50
63
80
100
B1
B2
B3
32
40
50
63
80
100
45
55
65
75
95
115
14
16
21
21
25
25
34
40
45
51
65
75
3.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
6.3
TG1
32.5
38
46.5
56.5
72
89
L1
L3
3
4
4
4
4
4
11.5
12
14
14
16
16
41
48
54
60
75
85
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
10
10
FL
22
25
27
32
36
41
10
10
10
12
16
16
d1 d2 d3 CN
XD
10
12
16
16
20
20
142
160
170
190
210
230
30
35
40
45
45
55
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
10.5
11
15
15
18
18
CP95
Bore
(mm)
C76
Bore
(mm)
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
HB
A-A
E
EX
EP
M
CX
D1
TG
R2
TG
EX
DL
L1
L2
MS
L3
EB
HB
R2
CX
D1
L4
EP
48 32.5
56
38
64 46.5
75 56.5
95
72
115 89
14
16
21
21
25
25
22
25
27
32
36
41
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
12
14
16
16
16
20
22
26
26
36
42
48
55
70
80
11
11
15
15
18
18
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
12.5
14.5
19.5
19.5
24.5
24.5
10
12
16
16
20
20
30
35
40
45
45
55
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
10
10
10
11.5
14.5
14.5
17.5
17.5
-X
(Made to Order)
CS5032
CS5040
CS5050
CS5063
CS5080
CS5100
Ra1,6 max
E
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Part No.
C95
DL
L2
EB
L1
L3
TG
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Counter pivot E
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
d2 CK S5
11
11
15
15
18
18
10
12
12
16
16
20
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
K1
K2
L3
G1
L1
G2
EM
G3
CA
H6
R1
38
41
50
52
66
76
51
54
65
67
86
96
10
10
12
14
18
20
21
24
33
37
47
55
7
9
11
11
12.5
13.5
18
22
30
35
40
50
26
28
32
40
50
60
31
35
45
50
60
70
32
36
45
50
63
71
8
10
12
12
14
15
10
11
12
15
15
19
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
d3 CN S5
11
11
15
15
18
18
10
12
16
16
20
20
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
K1
K2
38
41
50
52
66
76
51
54
65
67
86
96
8.5
8.5
10.5
10.5
11.5
12.5
G1
G2
G3
EN
EU
CH
H6
ER
21
24
33
37
47
55
18
22
30
35
40
50
31
35
45
50
60
70
14
16
21
21
25
25
10.5
12
15
15
18
18
32
36
45
50
63
71
10
10
12
12
14
15
15
18
20
23
27
30
5-9
CP95
Series
Accessories
Floating joint JA
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50/63
80/100
31
24
5
31
6
41 7.5
59.5 11.5
8
11
14
24
8
11
13.5
16
17
22
27
32
9
13
15
18
0.5
0.75
1.0
2.0
M10 X 1.25
32
M12 X 1.25
40
50/63 M16 X 1.5
80/100 M20 X 1.5
L1
10
12
16
20
40
48
64
80
10
12
16
20
52
62
83
105
20
24
32
40
20
24
32
40
d3
d1
d6
b3
b1
d7
L3
SW
32
40
50/63
80/100
M10 X 1.25
M12 X 1.25
M16 X 1.5
M20 X 1.5
10
12
16
20
43
50
64
77
28
32
42
50
10.5
12
15
18
14
16
21
25
20
22
28
33
19
22
27
34
13
13
15
15
14
16
26
26
17
19
32
32
5-10
70
160
300
1080
Radial
deflection
5
CP95K
Series
How to Order
CP95KD B 32
100 W
Z76 S
Number of
auto switches
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
Rod specifications
Stainless steel 1.4301 standard
double/through rod
C76
32
40
50
63
80
100
Bore size
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
S
3
n
Stroke (mm)
Refer to standard stroke table
on p.5-12 maximum 1000mm
Load voltage
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Special function
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Reed
switch
Type
Grommet
DC
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
2 wire
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
AC
100V
3 wire (PNP)
Grommet
5V
12V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Vertical
Z76
Z73
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
Z80
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
IC circuit
Mounting
bracket
BMP1-032
Relay
PLC
C95
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
BMP1-032
+
BMG2-012
D(Auto Switch)
32~100
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
BMP1-032
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore size
(mm)
CP95
B
L
F
G
C
D
2
1
3
n
Auto switch
Mounting
C85
Built-in magnet
-X
(Made to Order)
Standard
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
BMG2-012
5-11
Series
CP95K
Specifications
Bore size
32
40
50
Action
Fluid
80
100
Air
Proof pressure
1.5MPa
1.0MPa
0.05MPa
Without magnet 10 to 70C (No freezing)
Lubrication
ISO Symbol
Double acting
63
Double acting
50 to 1000mm/s
+1.4
to 250: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000: 0
Cushion
Port size
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
Basic, axial direction foot, front flange, rear flange, single rear
clevis, double rear clevis, spherical bearing
Mounting
Non-rotating accuracy
32, 40
0.5
50, 63
0.5
0.3
80, 100
32
0.25
80
0.79
40
0.45
100
0.93
50, 63
0.64
Note 1) Absorbable kinetic energy by cushion mechanism is identical to double acting single rod.
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Max.
stroke
32
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
40
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
800
50
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
700
63
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
Theoretical Force
80
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
100
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
675
63
2804
40
50
1082
80
4568
1651
100
7223
Weight
(kg)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Basic
0.56
0.84
1.39
1.91
3.22
4.24
Axial foot
0.16
0.20
0.38
0.46
0.89
1.09
Flange
0.20
0.23
0.47
0.58
1.30
1.81
Single clevis
0.16
0.23
0.37
0.60
1.07
1.73
Double clevis
0.20
0.32
0.45
0.71
1.28
2.11
0.11
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.42
0.56
0.15
0.23
0.26
0.26
0.60
0.83
0.22
0.37
0.43
0.43
0.87
1.27
Basic weight
Bore size
32
40
50
(1)
Foot
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 4) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 5) Piston rod nut is standard
5-12
63
80
100
Series
CP95K
Construction
C76
CP95
plated
plated
plated
plated
C95
Material
Die-cast aluminum
Die-cast aluminum
Die-cast aluminum
Stainless Steel
Die-cast aluminum
Brass
Steel, zinc chromate
Steel, zinc chromate
Steel, zinc chromate
Steel nickel plated
Lead-bronze casting
Steel, zinc chromate
Elastomer
Antifriction material
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
-X
(Made to Order)
list
Description
Head cover
End cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Cushion ring
Tie rod
Tie rod nut
Rod end nut
Snap ring
Bushing
Cushion valve
Cushion seal
Wear ring
Piston seal
Rod seal
Cylinder tube gasket
Cushioning valve seal
Piston/rod gasket
Magnet ring
D(Auto Switch)
Parts
No.
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore
32
40
50
63
80
100
5-13
Series
CP95K
[mm]
CP95KB-Stroke
Stroke end
cushioning
STROKE
STROKE
CP95KB-Stroke W
STROKE
STROKE
STROKE
Bore AM B D EE
PL
RT
I12
KK
SW SW1 G
BG I8
VD VA WA
WB
WH ZZ
ZY
E
R
I2
Ig
32
40
50
63
80
100
13
14
15.5
16.5
19
19
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
6
6.5
8
8
10
10
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M16x1.5
M16x1.5
M20x1.5
M20x1.5
10
13
16
16
21
21
16
16
16
16
16
16
4
4
6
6
8
8
6.5
9
10.5
12
14
15
26
30
37
37
46
51
190
213
244
259
300
320
46
52
65
75
95
114
32.5
38
46.5
56.5
72
89
15
17
24
24
30
32
4
4
5
5
5
5
5-14
22
24
32
32
40
40
30
35
40
45
45
55
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
12.2
14.2
19
19
23
27
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
94
105
106
121
128
138
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
9
11.5
17
146
163
179
194
218
233
Series
CP95Q
How to Order
CP95QD B 32
Standard
Z76 S
CA
100 R
Number of
auto switches
Built-in magnet
Bore size
32
40
50
63
80
100
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
C85
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
S
3
n
CA
CB
C76
B
L
F
G
C
D
Auto switch
Mounting
Rod specifications
Hard chrome as standard
Stainless steel piston rod
Stainless steel and acid-proof piston rod
R
K
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
100V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
AC
12V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Vertical
Z76
Z73
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
Z80
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
Mounting
bracket
C95
Grommet
DC
BMP1-032
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
BMP1-032
+
BMG2-012
D(Auto Switch)
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Reed
switch
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Special function
-X
(Made to Order)
Load voltage
Type
CP95
Stroke (mm)
Order No.
32~100
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
Model Selection
Procedures
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
5-15
Series
CP95Q
Specifications
32
40
50
63
80
100
Action
One direction
Air
Fluid
1.05MPa
Proof pressure
Max. operating pressure
0.7MPa
0.01MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to 70C (No freezing)
Lubrication
None
Cushion
G 1/8
Port size
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 3/8
G 1/2
Mounting
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
ISO Symbol
Double acting
Max.
stroke
32
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
40
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
800
50
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
63
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
80
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
100
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
700
Bore size
32
40
50
(1)
Foot
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 4) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 5) Piston rod nut is standard
5-16
63
80
100
Series
CP95Q
Application Example
Low friction cylinder used in combination with precision regulator (Series IR)
Winding roller
Quick Reference
Guide
Driving
roller
Precision regulator
f
Precision regulator
(Moving body)
C55
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
5-17
Series
CP95Q
Construction
A
Parts list
No.
Description
Head cover
End cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Cushion ring
Tie rod
Tie rod nut
Rod end nut
Snap ring
Bushing
Cushion valve
Cushion seal
Wear ring
Piston seal
Rod seal
Cylinder tube gasket
Cushioning valve seal
Piston/rod gasket
Magnet ring
Material
Die-cast aluminum
Die-cast aluminum
Die-cast aluminum
Hard chromed steel C45
Die-cast aluminum
Brass
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Steel nickel plated
Lead-bronze casting
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Elastomer
Antifriction material
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
32
40
50
63
80
100
5-18
Order No.
CQ95-32
CQ95-40
CQ95-50
CQ95-63
CQ95-80
CQ95-100
A'
Series
CP95P
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
100 Z76 S
Number of
auto switches
Bore size
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
C76
B
L
G
C
D
2
1
3
n
Auto switch
Mounting
C85
Built-in magnet
Stroke (mm)
Refer to standard stroke table
on p.5-4 maximum 300mm
Load voltage
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Special function
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Reed
switch
Type
Grommet
DC
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
AC
100V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
12V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Vertical
Z76
Z73
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
Z80
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
Mounting
bracket
BMP1-032
Relay
PLC
C95
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
BMP1-032
+
BMG2-012
D(Auto Switch)
32~100
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
BMP1-032
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore size
(mm)
CP95
CP95PD B 32
-X
(Made to Order)
Standard
BMG2-012
5-19
Series
CP95P
Specifications
Application:
The positioner IP200 is capable of pneumatic positioning of the
piston. Adjustable positions can be reached with high repeating
accuracy. The piston stroke is in proportion to the air pressure input
signal (0.02-0.01MPa). External forces on the position of the piston are
reduced to a minimum by a special control system and an integrated
function to revert the set position.
The IP200 shows excellent performance in remote control or
standard control of flaps, proportioning devices, pumps, gears usw.
Specifications
- The bleed pressure acts directly onto the flapper plate. A change
of the input signal will cause an instantaneous movement of the
piston rod.
- easy and simple adjustment of neutral point and operation band
from outside.
- Return spring is potected against accidental touches
- Positioner cylinder conforms to ISO and CETOP recommendations
- No change in dimensions with auto switch capability
Specifications
Fluid
Air 5m filtration
0.3 ~ 0.7
0.02 ~ 0.1
+5 to +60
Linearity
< 2%*
Hystereses
< 1%*
Repeatability
< 1%*
Sensitivity
< 1%*
Port size
G1/4
Gauge port
G1/8
Primary pressure
Leakage
40 to 100
25 to 300
50/100/150/200/250/300
300
50
63
80
100
50
63
80
100
0.38
0.46
0.89
1.09
0.47
0.58
1.30
1.81
0.37
0.60
1.07
1.73
0.45
0.71
1.28
2.11
0.42
0.52
0.94
1.40
50
63
80
100
2.27
2.79
4.11
5.13
0.32
0.33
0.48
0.62
Weight Table
Weight (kg)
Weight each
50mm stroke
Example: CP95PDB50-200
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 4) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 5) Piston rod nut is standard
For dimensions of the brackets and accessories, please see C95S, page 5-4
5-20
Series
CP95P
VD
6
6
8
8
ZZ
179
194
218
233
Dimensions
Signal Pressure/Stroke Diagram
Quick Reference
Guide
100
C55
50
0.02
0.04
0.06
C85
25
0.08
0.1
C76
CP95
Stroke
In
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Sup
Stroke
Stroke
Model Selection
Procedures
Stroke [%]
75
50
63
80
100
AM
32
32
40
40
B
40
45
45
55
D
20
20
25
30
E
65
75
95
114
G
31.5
31.5
38
38
KK
M16 x 1.5
M16 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
l8
106
121
128
138
R
46.5
56.5
72
89
T
52.1
53.8
53.8
25.6
VA
4
4
4
4
WH
37
37
46
51
5-21
CP95N
Series
CP95ND B 32
100
Z76 S
Number of
auto switches
Built-in magnet
B
L
F
G
C
D
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
Bore size
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
Auto switch
Mounting
Rod specifications
Hard chrome as standard
Double/through rod
Stroke (mm)
Load voltage
Type
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Special function
Wiring
(output)
Reed
switch
3 wire
Grommet
DC
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
AC
100V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
12V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
Vertical
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
Z76
Z73
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
Z80
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
Order No.
32~100
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
5-22
BMP1-032
BMG2-012
BMP1-032
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
Mounting
bracket
BMP1-032
+
BMG2-012
Cylinder
Series CP95N
with lock
Cylinder Specifications
Bore Size [mm]
Fluid
Quick Reference
Guide
Proof Pressure
1.5MPa
1.0MPa
0.08MPa
Piston speed
50 to 1000mm/s
Ambient and
fluid temperature
note)
C55
Cushion
+1.0
+1.4
Bracket type
max. possible stroke [mm]
C85
Note) Load limits exist depending upon piston speed when locked, mounting direction and operating pressure.
Lock actuation
C76
Lock Specifications
Spring lock (exhaust lock)
Unlocking pressure
0.25MPa
Locking pressure
0.20MPa
CP95
1.0MPa
2 Two-way
Standard Stroke
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500
700
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500
800
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600
-X
(Made to Order)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Max. Stroke
C95
1000
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600,700,800
Stopping Accuracy
Spring lock
[mm]
300
500
1000
0.3
0.6
1.0
2.0
Model Selection
Procedures
Locking system
D(Auto Switch)
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600,700,800
Intermediate strokes are available.
* Please consult with SMC for longer stroke.
32
40
50
63
80
100
552
882
1370
2160
3430
5390
5-23
Series
CP95N
CP95N Cylinder
Part No: Mounting Bracket, Mounting Accessories
Description
32
Bore size
40
50
63
80
100
Foot(1)
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
32
40
50
63
80
100
Basic type B
1.40
2.15
3.53
5.18
8.99
12.72
0.11
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.42
0.56
L
F
C
D
32
0.16
0.20
0.16
0.20
40
0.20
0.23
0.23
0.32
50
0.38
0.47
0.37
0.45
63
0.46
0.58
0.60
0.71
80
0.89
1.30
1.07
1.28
100
1.09
1.81
1.73
2.11
Example:
:
Cylinder 40 mm, Stroke 100 mm, bracket D
100
Weight = 0.84 kg + (0.16 kg x
) + 0.32 kg = 1.48 kg
50
Construction Principles
Spring lock (exhaust lock)
The spring force which acts upon the taper ring is
magnified by a wedge effect, and is conveyed to all of
the numeous steel balls which are arranged in two
crcles. These act on the brake shoe holder and
brake, which locks the piston rod by tightening
against it with a large force.
Unlocking is accomplished when air pressure is
supplied to the unlocking port. The brake piston and
taper ring oppose the spring force, moving to the
right side, and the ball retainer strikes the cover
section A. The braking force is released as the steel
balls are removed from the taper ring by the ball
retainer.
Locked condition
5-24
Unlocked condition
Series
CP95N
Construction
$9 !3 !4 @3 #5 t @7 $5 !5 @4 !8 @0 !7 !9 i @2 q %0 r y #0 $0 $2 w
A
$3
#8 @9
Quick Reference
Guide
#3
!2
63
#1
Section B
50
#2
Section C
80, 100
Rod cover
Aluminium alloy
Head cover
Aluminium alloy
Cover
Aluminium alloy
Cylinder tubing
Aluminium alloy
Hard annodised
Piston rod
Carbon steel
Piston
Aluminium alloy
Chromated
Taper Ring
Carbon steel
Heat treated
Ball retainer
Special resin
Piston guide
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Carbon steel
Heat treated
Aluminium alloy
Hard annodised
40
50
!1
63
Release piston
32
80
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
100
Release piston bushing
Unlocking cam
Carbon steel
Glossy chromated
Washer
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Brake spring
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Clip A
Stainless steel
Clip B
Stainless steel
Steel ball A
Carbon steel
Steel ball B
Carbon steel
Tooth ring
Stainless steel
@9
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
$0
$1
$2
$3
$4
$5
$6
$7
$8
$9
%0
Description
Cushion valve
Wear ring
Material
Carbon steel
Note
Nickel plated
PUR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
BC element
Tie-rod nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Piston seal
NBR
NBR
Rod seal A
NBR
Cushion seal
NBR
NBR
Piston gasket
NBR
NBR
Rod seal B
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
CR
Model Selection
Procedures
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6
@7
@8
No.
Polyurethane rubber
Damper
C type retaining ring for unlocking cam shaft Carbon steel
C type retaining ring for taper ring Carbon steel
Brake shoe
Tie rod
Carbon steel
Bushing
Lead-bronze casting
Cushion ring
Brass
CP95
Note
C95
Material
-X
(Made to Order)
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
Parts list
Description
D(Auto Switch)
Parts list
No.
32
40
80, 100
$4 @8 #9 @6 #4
C85
80
100
$1 e $8 o $7 !1 @1 !6 @5 u !0 $6 #7 #6
!22
C76
!2
Section A
C55
Chromated
5-25
Series
CP95N
Dimensions
Basic type ( B)
Stroke
Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
AM
22
24
32
32
40
40
Be
B2
11
30
46
35
52
40
65
45
75
45
95
55 114
Bore size
KK
(mm)
M10 x 1.25
32
M12 x 1.25
40
M16 x 1.5
50
M16 x 1.5
63
M20 x 1.5
80
M20 x 1.5
100
5-26
BG
BN
BP
I8
I9
I 12
164
182
195
224
259
289
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6.5
8
8
10
10
EE
E1
GA
46
52
65
75
95
114
54
63
75
90
102
116
13
13
14
14
20
20
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
83
91
104.5
119.5
150
170
RT
SW
SW1
37 32.5 M6
13
14 41.5 38 M6
15.5 47.5 46.5 M8
16.5 55 56.5 M8
61
19
72 M10
68
19
89 M10
10
13
16
16
21
21
17
19
24
24
30
30
97 G1/8
16
16 104 G1/8
16 120.5 G1/4
16 134.5 G1/4
16 169 G1/4
16 189 G1/4
PL
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
34 6.5
39.5 8
9
47
55.5 8.5
61.5 10.5
69.5 10.5
GC
GD
GE
GF
GL
VA
VB
VD
4
4
4
4
4
4
13
16.5
20
23
33
37.5
4
4
6
6
8
8
GL 1
H1
12
12
15
12
18
20
48
54
69
69
86
91
6
8
11
11
13
16
WB
WH
ZZ
4
6.5
4
9
5 10.5
9
12
11.5 14
17
15
26
30
37
37
46
51
216
240
268
297
349
384
WA
Series
CP95N
Dimensions
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
C85
Stroke
Bore size
KK
(mm)
M10 x 1.25
32
M12 x 1.25
40
M16 x 1.5
50
M16 x 1.5
63
M20 x 1.5
80
M20 x 1.5
100
BN
BP
97 G1/8
16
16 104 G1/8
16 120.5 G1/4
16 134.5 G1/4
16 169 G1/4
16 189 G1/4
I2
I8
I9
I 12
15
17
24
24
30
32
164
182
195
224
259
289
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6.5
8
8
10
10
EE
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
E1
GA
46
52
65
75
95
114
54
63
75
90
102
116
13
13
14
14
20
20
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
83
91
104.5
119.5
150
170
RT
SW
SW1
37 32.5 M6
13
14 41.5 38 M6
15.5 47.5 46.5 M8
16.5 55 56.5 M8
61
19
72 M10
68
19
89 M10
10
13
16
16
21
21
17
19
24
24
30
30
PL
GC
GD
GE
GF
GL 1
H1
12
12
15
12
18
20
48
54
69
69
86
91
6
8
11
11
13
16
WB
WH
ZY
4
6.5
4
9
5 10.5
9
12
11.5 14
17
15
26
30
37
37
46
51
260
290
333
362
431
471
GL
34 6.5
39.5 8
9
47
55.5 8.5
61.5 10.5
69.5 10.5
VA
VB
VD
4
4
4
4
4
4
13
16.5
20
23
33
37.5
4
4
6
6
8
8
WA
C95
BG
-X
(Made to Order)
22
24
32
32
40
40
Be
B2
11
30
46
35
52
40
65
45
75
45
95
55 114
D(Auto Switch)
AM
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
CP95
C76
Stroke
5-27
Series
CP95N
XA + stroke
SA + stroke
ZF + stroke
XD + stroke
Bore size
(mm)
AB
7
32
9
40
9
50
9
63
12
80
14
100
5-28
AH
AO
AT
CB1)
32
36
45
50
63
71
10
11
12
12
14
16
4
4
5
5
6
6
26
28
32
40
50
60
1) +0.03/+0.1
2) -0.2/-0.6
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
XA
XD
ZF
16
20
25
25
30
35
214
240
264
293
346
381
212
237
259
293
341
381
200
222
244
273
321
356
CD
E1
H9
48
10
55
12
68
12
80
16
16 100
20 120
E2
EB EW 2) FB
56 65
65 75
77 80
92 90
100 110
120 140
26
28
32
40
50
60
7
9
9
9
12
14
LY
MF
MR
SA
TF
TR
UB
UF
12
15
15
20
20
25
59
67.5
82.5
95
114
129
10
10
12
12
16
16
9.5
12
12
16
16
20
38
46
52
62
63
75
212
238
259
288
341
371
72
83
100
115
126
150
32
36
45
50
63
75
45
52
60
70
90
110
87
101
120
135
153
178
Series CP95N
2. [Vertical]
load in direction
of rod extension
1. Basic Circuits
1. [Horizontal]
Forward
in direction
[ ofLoad
rod retraction ]
Regulator
w/check
valve
3 ports
normally
closed
Sol.A
pressure
centre
Sol.C
Sol.B
Sol.C
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Action
Forward
Locked stop
Unlocked
Forward
Backward
Locked stop
Unlocked
Backward
2. [Vertical]
Load in direction
of rod extension
Load in direction
of rod retraction
Sol.C
0.5s or
more
0 to
0.5s
Sol.C
Sol.B
Sol.A
0.5s or
more
Sol.A
0 to
0.5s
C55
Backward
Sol.A Sol.B
ON ON
OFF OFF
ON OFF
ON ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
Sol.B
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
Caution
Warning
Manual Unlocking
Sol.B
Sol.A
Sol.A
Sol.C
Sol.B
Caution
on the unlocking
3. Do not turn the unlocking cam (the arrow
cam head) past the FREE position. If it is turned too far there
is a danger of damaging the unlocking cam.
C95
CP95
Sol.C
C76
Caution
1. The unlocking cam provided on the C95N Series is an
emergency unlocking mechanism only.
During an emergency when the air supply is cut off, it is used to
alleviate a problem by forcibly pushing the release piston back to
release the lock. However, take note that the sliding resistance of
the piston rod will be high compared to unlocking with air pressure.
2. When installing into equipment or machinery, etc., in cases
where it will be necessary to hold an unlocked condition for
an extended time, air pressure of 0.25MPa or more should be
applied to the unlocking port.
Release psiton
Unlocking cam
Locked condition
[Principle]
1. [Horizontal]
W
3 ports
normally open
Sol.C
Model Selection
Procedures
[Example]
-X
(Made to Order)
Cylinder side
D(Auto Switch)
Cylinder side
Sol.B
regulator with
relief function
Sol.A
3 ports
normally closed
5-29
Series
CP95N
Caution
Step 1
Graph 1
10
700
600 Strok
e
S
500 troke
Str
oke
400
Str
oke
300
Str
oke
200
Str
oke
Example)
5
4
V'
W
Cylinder stroke
Movement distance
of load
[Example]
100
Str
oke
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
100
200
Selection Example
Load weight: m=50kg
Movement distance: Stroke=500mm
Movement time: t=2s
Load condition: Vertical downward=Load in direction of rod extension
Operating pressure: P=0.4MPa
Step 1: From graph 1 find the maximum movement speed of the load
Maximum speed V: approx 350mm/s
Step 2: Select graph 6 based upon the load condition and operating
pressure, and then from the intersection of the maximum speed
V=350mm/s found in step 1, and the load weight m=50kg
63 selecta C95NDB63 or larger bore size.
300
400
500
1000
Step 2
Load condition
Operating pressure
from 0.3MPa
Graph 2
from 0.4MPa
Graph 3
from 0.5MPa
Graph 4
from 0.3MPa
Graph 5
from 0.4MPa
Graph 6
from 0.5MPa
Graph 7
m
F
m
F
5-30
Series
CP95N
Selection Graphs
Graph 2
0.3MPa P<0.4MPa
Graph 5
1000
50
40
30
32
20
10
100
32
10
300
400
500
50
40
20
5
4
3
200
63
50
40
30
5
4
3
1
100
100
100
80
C55
50
40
100
1
100
1000
200
0.4MPa P<0.5MPa
0.4MPa P<0.5MPa
20
10
100
63
50
40
30
50
40
[Example]
10
5
4
3
200
300
400
500
32
20
5
4
3
1
100
1000
200
500
1000
Graph 7
0.5MPa P
500
400
300
63
50
40
200
32
50
40
30
20
10
100
50
40
30
1000
63
50
40
32
10
5
4
3
500
100
80
20
5
4
3
200
300
400
Maximum speed: V [mm /s]
D(Auto Switch)
1000
100
80
400
Graph 4
1
100
300
Model Selection
Procedures
1
100
C76
100
80
C95
32
200
1
100
-X
(Made to Order)
50
50
40
500
400
300
63
63
50
40
30
100
1000
CP95
100
80
100
200
500
1000
200
500
400
300
400
Graph 6
1000
1000
300
Graph 3
500
400
300
Quick Reference
Guide
200
63
C85
200
Load weight: m [kg]
500
400
300
100
80
500
400
300
0.3MPa P<0.4MPa
1000
200
300
400
500
1000
5-31
Series
CP95
[mm]
Minimum strokes for auto switches
Auto switch type Model
32
Reed
25
15
25
15
Solid
state
Amount* of
switches
D-Z73L 2 pcs.
D-Z80L 1 pcs.
D-Y59BL 2 pcs.
D-Y69BL 1 pcs.
D-Y7PL
40
50
63
80
100
*Auto switches are mounted on the same side but in different grooves of the cylinder.
[mm]
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
When attaching an auto switch, first take a switch holder between your fingers and
press it into a switch mounting groove. When doing this, confirm that it is set in the
correct mounting orientation, or reattach if necessary. Next, insert an auto switch into
the groove and slide it until it is positioned under the switch holder.
After establishing the mounting position, use a watchmakers flat head screw driver to
tighten the switch mounting screw which is included.
Switch holder
BMP1-032
Incorrect
Correct
32
40
50
63
80
100
Order No.
Auto
switch
D-Z73L
D-Z80L
D-Y7PL
D-Y59BL
D-Y69BL
Order No.
32
40
50
63
80
100
CP95-AL
Switch holder
BMP1-032
Cylinder length
without stroke
41.5 mm
52.5 mm
44.5 mm
59.5 mm
53.5 mm
63.5 mm
5-32
Series CP95
MB-63-10-C1250
Bolt
Caution
Width
across flats
Tightening
torque (Nm)
32, 40
MB-32-48-C1247
4.9
50, 63
MB-50-48-C1249
11
25
80,
Foot
MB-80-48AC1251
100
Others
MB-80-48BC1251
JIS 4648
Hex spanner wrench 2.5
JIS 4648
Hex spanner wrench 4
CP95
2.5
C95
MB-32-10-C1247
Socket wrench
-X
(Made to Order)
32, 40, 50
D(Auto Switch)
Width
across flats
Model Selection
Procedures
Caution
C55
Operating Precautions
C76
Warning
Quick Reference
Guide
Adjustment
5-33
Symbol
Specifications/Descriptions
Page
CJP
-XA0 to A30
-XB5
-XB6
(1)
(2)
-XB7
(3)
(2)
-XB9
(1)
(1)
-XB10
-XB11
Long stroke
-XB12
-XB13
(1)
!0
-XC3
(1)
!1
-XC4
!2
-XC5
!3
-XC6
!4
-XC7
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. made of stainless steel
!5
-XC8
!6
-XC9
!7
-XC10
!8
-XC11
!9
-XC12
Tandem cylinder
@0
-XC13
@1
-XC14
@2
-XC15
N@3
-XC17
@4
-XC18
NPT port
@5
-XC20
@6
-XC22
@7
-XC24
@8
-XC25
@9
-XC27
Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made of stainless steel
#0
-XC28
#1
-XC29
#2
-XC30
Front trunnion
#3
-XC34
#4
-XC35
#5
-XC36
#6
-XC37
#7
-XC38
#8
-XC42
#9
-XC51
$0
-XC52
$1
-XC56
$2
-XC57
5-34
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
CA1
CS1
C95 CP95
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
CD
(3)
ISO/VDMA Cylinder
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
C95
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
6-1
Series
C95
Model Selection
Execution
Model
Options
Adjustable Piston Rod
Stroke End
Cushioning Standard
Hard Chrome W
C95 SB
C95 SDB
C95 ST
With Mounting
C95 SDT
Centre Trunnion
C95 KB
Non-Rotating
C95 KDB
Piston Rod
Non Rotating Piston Rod C95 KT
C95 KDT
with Centre Trunnion
C95 NB
With Lock
C95 NDB
Non Rotating Piston Rod C95 NT
C95NDT
with Centre Trunnion
C95PB
With Positioner
C95 PDB
C95 QB -CA
Low Friction Cylinder
-CB
C95 QDB -CA
-CB
C95 QT -CA
Low Friction Cylinder
-CB
C95 QDT -CA
with Centre Trunnion
-CB
Standard Type
W = Double/through rod
R = Stainless Steel Piston Rod
K = Stainless &Acid-Proof Piston Rod & Nickel Plated Tie Rods
6-2
Options
Standard
C95
Series
Quick Reference
Guide
Standard
A53 S
100 W
Number of
auto switches
Bore size
Basic/Without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Centre trunnion
32
40
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
Rod Specifications
W
R
K
F
C85
B
L
F
G
C
D
T
Auto switch
Mounting
C55
Built-in magnet
Stroke (mm)
C76
5V
AC
A56
Yes
A53
A54
A67
A64
A59W
F59
F5P
J51
J59
F59W
F5PW
J59W
F5BA
F5NT
F59F
12V
5V,12V 100V,200V
24V 5V,12V
3 wire (PNP)
100V,200V
2 wire
12V
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
Diagnosis indication
Grommet Yes 3 wire (PNP)
(2 colour)
(2 colour)
Grommet
Reed
switch
Special function
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Grommet
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
5V,12V
12V
32, 40 BMB5-032
50, 63
BA7-040
80, 100 BA7-063
50,63
BT-05
80,100
BT-06
IC
AC
100V
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Vertical
Mounting
bracket
Z76
Z73
Z80
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
32,40
BMB4-032
12V
12V
Order No.
IC Relay
PLC
5V, 12V
32,40
BT-03
5V, 12V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
Relay
IC PLC
IC
F5LF
DC
Bore size
(mm)
Load voltage
Type
IC
CP95
(Equiv. to NPN)
DC
C95
Reed switch
3 wire
Mounting
bracket
-X
(Made to Order)
Wiring
(Output)
Auto switch
Applicable
0.5 3 5
model
load
() (L) (Z)
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
50,63
BMB4-050
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
80,100
BA4-063
See
Table q
6-3
D(Auto Switch)
Special function
Table q
Load voltage
Model Selection
Procedures
Style
Electrical
entry
Indicator
Series
C95
Specifications
Bore size
32
40
50
Action
Fluid
1.0MPa
0.05MPa
Without magnet 10 to 70C (No freezing)
With magnet 10 to 60C (No freezing)
Lubrication
50 to 1000mm/s
to 250:
+1.0
0 ,
251 to 1000:
+1.4
0 ,1001
to 1500: +1.8
0
Cushion
JIS class 2
Thread tolerance
G1/8
Port size
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
Mounting
100
Air
80
1.5MPa
Proof pressure
ISO Symbol
Double acting
63
Double acting
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Max.
stroke
32
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
700
40
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
800
50
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1200
63
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1200
80
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1400
100
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1500
Bore size
32
40
50
Foot(1)
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Trunnion pivot
bracket
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) C95-S: Set of 2 pcs.
Note 4) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 5) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 6) Piston rod nut is standard
6-4
63
80
100
Series
25
100
30
0.8
0.9
1.0
804
161
241
322
402
482
563
643
724
804
IN
691
138
207
276
346
415
484
553
622
691
300
OUT
1257
251
377
503
629
754
200
634
739
IN
1056
211
317
422
528
1963
393
589
785
IN
1649
330
495
660
825
OUT
3117
623
63
50
40
950 1056
845
IN
2803
561
OUT
5027
IN
4536
OUT
7854
IN
7147
100
80
32
50
30
20
10
5
Weight Table
(kg)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Basic
0.56
0.84
1.39
1.91
3.22
4.24
Foot
0.16
0.20
0.38
0.46
0.89
1.09
Flange
0.20
0.23
0.47
0.58
1.30
1.81
Single clevis
0.16
0.23
0.37
0.60
1.07
1.73
Double clevis
0.20
0.32
0.45
0.71
1.28
2.11
Trunnion
0.15
0.26
0.34
0.56
1.03
1.71
0.11
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.42
0.56
0.15
0.23
0.26
0.26
0.60
0.83
0.22
0.37
0.43
0.43
0.87
1.27
Basic weight
80
500
OUT
OUT
100
100
300 500
1000 2000
C85
80
0.7
C76
20
0.6
CP95
63
0.5
C95
20
0.4
-X
(Made to Order)
50
0.3
D(Auto Switch)
16
900
0.2
Model Selection
Procedures
40
12
IN
Quick Reference
Guide
OUT
(Unit : N)
C55
Theoretical Force
C95
6-5
Series
C95
Construction
Component Parts
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
Description
Material
Rod cover
Aluminum die cast
Head cover
Aluminum die cast
Cylinder tube
Aluminum die cast
Piston rod
C45 anodised steel
Piston
Aluminum die cast
Cushion ring
Brass
Tie rod
Steel
Tie rod nut
Steel
Mounting nut
Steel
Cushion adjustment screw
Steel
Bushing
Bronze bush
Serrated washer
Steel
Cushion seal
PUR
Note
(chromated)
(chromated)
(chromated)
(chromated)
(chromated)
Seal Kits
Bore size (mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Kit No.
CS95-32
CS95-40
CS95-50
CS95-63
CS95-80
CS95-100
Contents
Kits include items
13 to 17 for 32,
12 to 18 for 40 to
100 from the table
above.
6-6
No.
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
Description
Wearing
Piston seal
Rod seal/Gasket
Cylinder tube gasket
Cushion screw seal
Piston gasket
Magnet ring
Material
Resin
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Note
Series
C95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
C95SB-Stroke
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C95SB-Stroke W
Bore
(mm)
AM
32
40
50
63
80
100
22
24
32
32
40
40
B
e11
30
35
40
45
45
55
EE
PL
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
13
14
15.5
16.5
19
19
RT
L12
KK
M6
6 M10 X 1.25
M6 6.5 M12 X 1.25
M8
8 M16 X 1.5
M8
8 M16 X 1.5
M10 10 M20 X 1.5
M10 10 M20 X 1.5
SW
BG
L8
VD
VA
10
13
16
16
21
21
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
16
16
16
16
16
16
94
105
106
121
128
138
4
4
6
6
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
WA
WB WH
4
6.5
4
9
5 10.5
9
12
11.5 14
17 15
26
30
37
37
46
51
ZZ
ZY
E
R
L2
L9
146
163
179
194
218
233
190 46 32.5
213 52 38
244 65 46.5
259 75 56.5
300 95 72
320 114 89
15
17
24
24
30
32
4
4
5
5
5
5
48
54
69
69
86
91
6-7
C95
Series
Centre Trunnion T
Flange F
Mounting at the back
Bore
(mm)
E1
W MF ZF FB CD EB
32
40
50
63
80
100
48
55
68
80
100
120
32
36
45
50
63
75
16
20
25
25
30
35
10
10
12
12
16
16
130 7
145 9
155 9
170 9
190 12
205 14
10 65 12
12 75 15
12 80 15
16 90 20
16 110 20
20 140 25
XD UB CB EW MR TR AO AT XA SA AH AB L1
142
160
170
190
210
230
45
52
60
70
90
110
26
28
32
40
50
60
26 9.5 32
28 12 36
32 12 45
40 16 50
50 16 63
60 20 75
10
11
12
12
14
16
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
144
163
175
190
215
230
142
161
170
185
210
220
32 7
36 10
45 10
50 10
63 12
71 14.5
17
22
22
28
34
40
TL TD TM UW TF UF E2
95
106.5
122
129.5
150
160
12
16
16
20
20
25
12 50 49
16 63 58
16 75 71
20 90 87
20 110 110
25 132 136
64
72
90
100
126
150
79
90
110
120
153
178
50
55
70
80
100
120
6-8
e
max
42
43
52
52
58
65
f
23
23
25
25
29
29
I
h
Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke
1-50 51-100 101-150 151-200 201-300 1-50 51-100 101-150 151-200 201-300
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
25
25
25
25
25
25
37.5
37.5
37.5
37.5
37.5
37.5
50
50
50
50
50
50
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
87
87
103
103
88
88
100
100
116
116
100
100
112
112
128
128
113
113
125
125
141
141
138
138
150
150
166
166
Series
C95
Accessories
Rear double clevis D
Bore
(mm)
E1 EW TG1 FL
L1
L2
d1
CD
MR
d2
R1 E2 UB
CB
45
51
64
74
94
113
5
5
5
5
5
5
12
15
15
20
20
25
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
10
10
30
35
40
45
45
55
10
12
12
16
16
20
9.5
12
12
16
16
20
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
6.5
6.5
8.5
8.5
11
12
26
28
32
40
50
60
32
40
50
63
80
100
26
28
32
40
50
60
32.5
38
46.5
56.5
72
89
22
25
27
32
36
41
48
45
56
52
64
60
75
70
95
90
115 110
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
B1
B2
B3
32
40
50
63
80
100
45
55
65
75
95
115
14
16
21
21
25
25
34
40
45
51
65
75
3.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
6.3
TG1
32.5
38
46.5
56.5
72
89
L1
L3
3
4
4
4
4
4
11.5
12
14
14
16
16
41
48
54
60
75
85
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
10
10
FL
22
25
27
32
36
41
10
10
10
12
16
16
d1 d2 d3 CN
XD
10
12
16
16
20
20
142
160
170
190
210
230
30
35
40
45
45
55
10.5
11
15
15
18
18
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
CP95
Bore
(mm)
C76
DL
L2
M
CX
D1
R2
L1
L3
TG
Bore
(mm)
CS5032
CS5040
CS5050
CS5063
CS5080
CS5100
CS5125
CS5160
CS5200
CS5250
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
TG
EX
DL
L1
L2
MS
L3
EB
HB
R2
CX
D1
L4
EP
48 32.5
56
38
64 46.5
75 56.5
95
72
115 89
140 110
178 140
225 175
282 220
14
16
21
21
25
25
37
43
43
49
22
25
27
32
36
41
50
55
60
70
5
5
5
5
5
5
7.5
7.5
7.5
11.5
10
10
10
12
14
16
20
20
25
25
16
16
20
22
26
26
38
40
42
50
36
42
48
55
70
80
100
125
125
130
11
11
15
15
18
18
20
25
25
31
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
13.5
17.5
17.5
22
12.5
14.5
19.5
19.5
24.5
24.5
32.5
38.5
40.5
44.5
10
12
16
16
20
20
30
35
35
40
30
35
40
45
45
55
60
65
75
90
5.5
5.5
6.5
6.5
10
10
10
10
11
11
10
11.5
14.5
14.5
17.5
17.5
24.5
29.5
29.5
34.5
Model Selection
Procedures
Counter pivot E
D(Auto Switch)
TG
Ra1,6 max
Part No.
C95
A-A
E
EX
EP
EB
-X
(Made to Order)
L4
HB
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
d2 CK S5
11
11
15
15
18
18
10
12
12
16
16
20
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
K1
K2
L3
G1
L1
G2
EM
G3
CA
H6
R1
Bore
(mm)
38
41
50
52
66
76
51
54
65
67
86
96
10
10
12
14
18
20
21
24
33
37
47
55
7
9
11
11
12.5
13.5
18
22
30
35
40
50
26
28
32
40
50
60
31
35
45
50
60
70
32
36
45
50
63
71
8
10
12
12
14
15
10
11
12
15
15
19
32
40
50
63
80
100
d3 CN S5
11
11
15
15
18
18
10
12
16
16
20
20
6.6
6.6
9
9
11
11
K1
K2
38
41
50
52
66
76
51
54
65
67
86
96
8.5
8.5
10.5
10.5
11.5
12.5
G1
G2
G3
EN
EU
CH
H6
ER
21
24
33
37
47
55
18
22
30
35
40
50
31
35
45
50
60
70
14
16
21
21
25
25
10.5
12
15
15
18
18
32
36
45
50
63
71
10
10
12
12
14
15
15
18
20
23
27
30
6-9
C95
Series
Accessories
Centre trunnion
Part No.
Bore
(mm)
C95-S03
C95-S04
C95-S06
C95-S10
TA
TC
TD
TE
TF
TH
TL
TO
TR
TS TT
TU
TX
62
32 46
80
40 52
80
50 65
63 75 100
80 95 100
100 114 120
62
80
92
110
130
158
12
16
16
20
20
25
74
97
109
130
150
184
47
60
60
80
80
100
35
45
45
60
60
75
45
60
60
70
70
90
12
17
17
20
20
26
7
9
9
11
11
13.5
10
12
12
14
14
17
8.5
10
10
15
15
15
50
49
63
58
75
71
90
87
110 110
132 136
8
11
14
24
8
11
13.5
16
17
22
27
32
9
13
15
18
0.5
0.75
1.0
2.0
13
17
17
22
22
24
TY
Z
95
106.5
122
129.5
150
160
Floating joint JA
Steel, zinc chromate plated
Bore
(mm)
32
40
50/63
80/100
31
24
5
31
6
41 7.5
59.5 11.5
M10 X 1.25
32
M12 X 1.25
40
50/63 M16 X 1.5
80/100 M20 X 1.5
6-10
2.5
4.4
11
18
70
160
300
1080
Radial
deflection
5
L1
Bore
(mm)
d3
d1
d6
b3
b1
d7
L3
SW
10
12
16
20
40
48
64
80
10
12
16
20
52
62
83
105
20
24
32
40
20
24
32
40
32
40
50/63
80/100
M10 X 1.25
M12 X 1.25
M16 X 1.5
M20 X 1.5
10
12
16
20
43
50
64
77
28
32
42
50
10.5
12
15
18
14
16
21
25
20
22
28
33
19
22
27
34
13
13
15
15
14
16
26
26
17
19
32
32
C95K
Series
Quick Reference
Guide
A53 S
Number of
auto switches
Bore size
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
Rod specifications
C76
Stroke (mm)
Refer to standard stroke table
on p.6-12
Wiring
(Output)
Reed switch
3 wire
(Equiv. to NPN)
DC
5V
Auto switch
Applicable
0.5 3 5
model
load
() (L) (Z)
AC
A56
Yes
A53
A54
A67
A64
A59W
F59
F5P
J51
J59
F59W
F5PW
J59W
F5BA
F5NT
F59F
12V
Grommet
5V,12V 100V,200V
24V 5V,12V
3 wire (PNP)
100V,200V
2 wire
12V
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
Diagnosis indication
3 wire (PNP)
Grommet
Yes
(2 colour)
(2 colour)
Reed
switch
Special function
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Grommet
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
2 wire
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
5V,12V
12V
32, 40 BMB5-032
50, 63
BA7-040
80, 100 BA7-063
50,63
BT-05
80,100
BT-06
IC
AC
100V
12V
12V
Order No.
IC Relay
PLC
5V, 12V
32,40
BT-03
5V, 12V
3 wire (PNP)
Grommet
5V
Relay
IC PLC
IC
F5LF
DC
Bore size
(mm)
Load voltage
Type
IC
Mounting
bracket
CP95
Electrical
entry
C95
Special function
Table q
Load voltage
-X
(Made to Order)
Style
Indicator
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Mounting
bracket
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
32,40
BMB4-032
Vertical
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
Z76
Z73
Z80
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
50,63
BMB4-050
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
80,100
BA4-063
See
Table q
6-11
D(Auto Switch)
32
40
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
Model Selection
Procedures
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Centre trunnion
2
1
3
n
Auto switch
Mounting
C85
Built-in magnet
B
L
F
G
C
D
T
C55
C95KD B 32
Standard
Series
C95K
Specifications
Bore size
32
40
50
Action
Fluid
80
100
Air
Proof pressure
1.5MPa
1.0MPa
0.05MPa
Without magnet 10 to 70C (No freezing)
Lubrication
ISO Symbol
Double acting
63
Double acting
50 to 1000mm/s
+1.4
to 250: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000: 0
Cushion
Thread tolerance
JIS class 2
Port size
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
Basic, axial direction foot, front flange, rear flange, single rear
clevis, double rear clevis, centre trunnion, spherical bearing
Mounting
Non-rotating accuracy
32, 40
0.5
50, 63
0.5
0.3
80, 100
32
0.25
80
0.79
40
0.45
100
0.93
50, 63
0.64
Note 1) Absorbable kinetic energy by cushion mechanism is identical to double acting single rod.
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Theoretical Force
OUT side is identical to double acting single rod.
Refer to table below for IN side.
675
63
2804
40
1082
80
4568
50
1651
100
7223
Max.
stroke
32
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
40
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
800
50
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
63
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
80
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
100
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
700
Weight
(kg)
Basic weight
32
40
50
63
80
100
0.56
0.84
1.39
1.91
3.22
4.24
Axial foot
0.16
0.20
0.38
0.46
0.89
1.09
Flange
0.20
0.23
0.47
0.58
1.30
1.81
Single clevis
0.16
0.23
0.37
0.60
1.07
1.73
Double clevis
0.20
0.32
0.45
0.71
1.28
2.11
Center trunnion
0.15
0.26
0.34
0.57
1.03
1.71
0.11
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.42
0.56
0.15
0.23
0.26
0.26
0.60
0.83
0.22
0.37
0.43
0.43
0.87
1.27
Bore size
32
40
50
Foot(1)
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Trunnion pivot
bracket
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) C95-S: Set of 2 pcs.
Note 4) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 5) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 6) Piston rod nut is standard
6-12
63
80
100
Series
C95K
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Construction
Component Parts
Note
(chromated)
(chromated)
(chromated)
(chromated)
No.
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
Description
Wearing
Piston seal
Rod seal/Gasket
Cylinder tube gasket
Cushion screw seal
Piston gasket
Magnet ring
Material
Resin
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Note
C76
Description
Material
Rod cover
Aluminum die cast
Head cover
Aluminum die cast
Cylinder tube
Aluminum die cast
Piston rod
C45 anodised steel
Piston
Aluminum die cast
Cushion ring
Brass
Tie rod
Steel
Tie rod nut
Steel
Mounting nut
Steel
Cushion adjustment screw
Steel
Bushing
Bronze bush
Serrated washer
Steel
PUR
Cushion seal
CP95
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
(chromated)
Kit No.
CS95-32
CS95-40
CS95-50
CS95-63
CS95-80
CS95-100
Contents
Kits include items
13 to 17 for 32,
12 to 18 for 40 to
100 from the table
above.
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Seal Kits
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
6-13
Series
C95K
C95KB-Stroke W
Bore size
AM
(mm)
B
e11
EE
PL
RT
KK
SW1 SW
BG
L8
6-14
VD
4
4
6
6
8
8
VA
4
4
4
4
4
4
WA WB WH
4
6.5
4
9
5 10.5
9
12
11.5 14
17 15
26
30
37
37
46
51
ZZ
146
163
179
194
218
233
ZY
E
R
190 46 32.5
213 52 38
244 65 46.5
259 75 56.5
300 95 72
320 114 89
L2
15
17
24
24
30
32
L9
4
4
5
5
5
5
48
54
69
69
86
91
C95Q
Series
How to Order
C95QD B 32
Standard
A53 S
CA
100 R
Number of
auto switches
Built-in magnet
Bore size
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Front flange
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Centre trunnion
32
40
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
C85
B
L
F
G
C
D
T
Auto switch
Mounting
C76
Rod specifications
Hard chrome as standard
Stainless steel piston rod
Stainless steel and acid-proof piston rod
R
K
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Stroke (mm)
Reed switch
3 wire
(Equiv. to NPN)
DC
5V
Auto switch
Applicable
0.5 3 5
model
load
() (L) (Z)
AC
A56
Yes
A53
A54
A67
A64
A59W
F59
F5P
J51
J59
F59W
F5PW
J59W
F5BA
F5NT
F59F
12V
5V,12V 100V,200V
24V 5V,12V
3 wire (PNP)
100V,200V
2 wire
12V
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
Diagnosis indication
Grommet
Yes 3 wire (PNP)
(2 colour)
(2 colour)
Grommet
Reed
switch
Special function
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Grommet
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
5V,12V
12V
50,63
BT-05
80,100
BT-06
IC
AC
100V
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
Mounting
bracket
Z76
Z73
Z80
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
32,40
BMB4-032
12V
12V
32, 40 BMB5-032
50, 63
BA7-040
80, 100 BA7-063
IC Relay
PLC
5V, 12V
32,40
BT-03
Order No.
5V, 12V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
Relay
IC PLC
IC
F5LF
DC
Bore size
(mm)
Load voltage
Type
IC
Mounting
bracket
C95
Wiring
(Output)
-X
(Made to Order)
Electrical
entry
D(Auto Switch)
Special function
Table q
Lead wire (m)
Load voltage
Vertical
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
50,63
BMB4-050
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
80,100
BA4-063
See
Table q
6-15
Model Selection
Procedures
Style
Indicator
CP95
Series
C95Q
Specifications
32
40
50
63
80
100
Action
One direction
Air
Fluid
1.05MPa
Proof pressure
Max. operating pressure
0.7MPa
0.01MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to 70C (No freezing)
Lubrication
None
Cushion
G 1/8
Port size
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 3/8
G 1/2
Mounting
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
ISO Symbol
Double acting
Max.
stroke
32
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
40
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
800
50
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
63
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
80
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
100
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 600
1000
700
Bore size
32
40
50
(1)
Foot
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Trunnion pivot
bracket
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) C95-S: Set of 2 pcs.
Note 4) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 5) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 6) Piston rod nut is standard
6-16
63
80
100
Series
C95Q
Application Example
Low friction cylinder used in combination with precision regulator (Series IR)
Winding roller
Quick Reference
Guide
Driving
roller
Precision regulator
f
Precision regulator
(Moving body)
C55
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
6-17
Series
C95Q
Construction
!2 r!4 y q
e !5 !3 t !8 !1 !7 w
!0 o
Component Parts
No.
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Bushing
Cushion valve
Snap ring
Tie rod
Tie rod nut
Wear rod
Rod end nut
Back up O ring
Rod seal
Piston seal
Cushion valve seal
Cylinder tube gasket
Piston gasket
Material
Note
Aluminum die-cast
Aluminum die-cast
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Lead bronze cast
Steel wire
Steel for spring
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Resin
Carbon steel
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Metallic painted
Metallic painted
Hard anodized
Hard chrome plated
Chromated
Nickel plated
40 to 100
Uni-chromated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
32
40
50
63
80
100
Kit No.
CQ95-32
CQ95-40
CQ95-50
CQ95-63
CQ95-80
CQ95-100
Contents
Set of the
No. !3, !4, !5, and !7.
The seal kit includes 1 rod seal, 1 piston seal, and 2 tube gaskets.
6-18
!6u i
C95P
Series
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
100 A53 S
C95PD B 32
Standard
Number of
auto switches
B
L
G
C
D
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
Bore size
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
Auto switch
Mounting
C85
Built-in magnet
Stroke (mm)
C76
(Equiv. to NPN)
DC
5V
AC
A56
Yes
A53
A54
A67
A64
A59W
F59
F5P
J51
J59
F59W
F5PW
J59W
F5BA
F5NT
F59F
12V
5V,12V 100V,200V
24V 5V,12V
3 wire (PNP)
100V,200V
2 wire
12V
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
Diagnosis indication
Grommet Yes 3 wire (PNP)
(2 colour)
(2 colour)
Grommet
Reed
switch
Special function
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Wiring
(output)
3 wire
Grommet
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
2 wire
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
3 wire (NPN)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
5V,12V
12V
50,63
BT-05
80,100
BT-06
IC
AC
100V
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Vertical
Mounting
bracket
Z76
Z73
Z80
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
32,40
BMB4-032
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
12V
12V
32, 40 BMB5-032
50, 63
BA7-040
80, 100 BA7-063
IC Relay
PLC
5V, 12V
32,40
BT-03
Order No.
5V, 12V
3 wire (PNP)
Grommet
5V
Relay
IC PLC
IC
F5LF
DC
Bore size
(mm)
Load voltage
Type
IC
CP95
Reed switch
3 wire
C95
Wiring
(Output)
Mounting
bracket
-X
(Made to Order)
Electrical
entry
Auto switch
Applicable
0.5 3 5
model
load
() (L) (Z)
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
50,63
BMB4-050
IC circuit
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
80,100
BA4-063
See
Table q
6-19
D(Auto Switch)
Special function
Table q
Lead wire (m)
Load voltage
Model Selection
Procedures
Style
Indicator
Series
C95P
Specifications
Application:
The positioner IP200 is capable of pneumatic positioning of the
piston. Adjustable positions can be reached with high repeating
accuracy. The piston stroke is in proportion to the air pressure input
signal (0.02-0.01MPa). External forces on the position of the piston are
reduced to a minimum by a special control system and an integrated
function to revert the set position.
The IP200 shows excellent performance in remote control or
standard control of flaps, proportioning devices, pumps, gears usw.
Specifications
- The bleed pressure acts directly onto the flapper plate. A change
of the input signal will cause an instantaneous movement of the
piston rod.
- easy and simple adjustment of neutral point and operation band
from outside.
- Return spring is potected against accidental touches
- Positioner cylinder conforms to ISO and CETOP recommendations
- No change in dimensions with auto switch capability
Specifications
Fluid
Air 5m filtration
0.3 ~ 0.7
0.02 ~ 0.1
+5 to +60
Linearity
< 2%*
Hystereses
< 1%*
Repeatability
< 1%*
Sensitivity
< 1%*
Port size
G1/4
Gauge port
G1/8
Primary pressure
Leakage
40 to 100
25 to 300
50/100/150/200/250/300
300
50
63
80
100
50
63
80
100
0.38
0.46
0.89
1.09
0.47
0.58
1.30
1.81
0.37
0.60
1.07
1.73
0.45
0.71
1.28
2.11
0.42
0.52
0.94
1.40
50
63
80
100
2.27
2.79
4.11
5.13
0.32
0.33
0.48
0.62
Weight Table
Weight (kg)
Weight each
50mm stroke
Example: C95PDB50-200
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double rear clevis: (D,DS): Clevis pin
Note 3) GKM according to ISO 8140
Note 4) KJ according to ISO 8139
Note 5) Piston rod nut is standard
For dimensions of the brackets and accessories, please see C95S, page 1-206
6-20
Series
C95P
Dimensions
Signal Pressure/Stroke Diagram
Quick Reference
Guide
100
C55
50
C85
25
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
C95
100
CP95
C76
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
40
Stroke [%]
75
50
63
80
100
AM
32
32
40
40
B
40
45
45
55
D
20
20
25
30
E
65
75
95
114
G
31.5
31.5
38
38
KK
M16 x 1.5
M16 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
l8
106
121
128
138
R
46.5
56.5
72
89
T
53
54
54
26
VA
4
4
4
4
VD
6
6
8
8
WH
37
37
46
51
ZZ
179
194
218
233
6-21
C95N
Series
Standard
100
A53 S
Number of
auto switches
Built-in magnet
B
L
G
C
D
T
Bore size
Basic/without bracket
Axial foot
Rear flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Trunion
32
40
50
63
80
100
S
3
n
32mm
40mm
50mm
63mm
80mm
100mm
2
1
3
n
Auto switch
Mounting
Rod specifications
Stroke (mm)
Refer to standard stroke table
on p.6-23.
Special function
Style
Electrical
entry
Indicator
Reed switch
3 wire
Load voltage
(Equiv. to NPN)
DC
5V
Auto switch
Applicable
0.5 3 5
model
load
() (L) (Z)
AC
A56
Yes
A53
A54
A67
A64
A59W
F59
F5P
J51
J59
F59W
F5PW
J59W
F5BA
F5NT
F59F
12V
5V,12V 100V,200V
24V 5V,12V
3 wire (PNP)
100V,200V
2 wire
12V
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
Diagnosis indication
Grommet Yes 3 wire (PNP)
(2 colour)
(2 colour)
Grommet
Special function
Electrical Indicator
light
entry
Wiring
(output)
Reed
switch
3 wire
Grommet
Yes
No
2 wire
24V
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2 colour indicator)
24V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
6-22
3 wire (NPN)
5V,12V
1 2V
Order No.
32, 40 BMB5-032
50, 63
BA7-040
80, 100 BA7-063
50,63
BT-05
80,100
BT-06
IC
AC
100V
Lateral
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
Vertical
Mounting
bracket
Z76
Z73
Z80
IC circuit
Relay
IC circuit PLC
32,40
BMB4-032
12V
12V
32,40
BT-03
IC Relay
PLC
5V, 12V
Bore size
(mm)
5V, 12V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
Relay
IC PLC
IC
F5LF
DC
Mounting
bracket
Load voltage
Type
IC
Table q
Auto Switch Mounting
Bracket for D-M9
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
IC circuit
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
50,63
BMB4-050
Relay
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay
PLC
80,100
BA4-063
See
Table q
Cylinder
Series C95N
with lock
Cylinder Specifications
Bore Size [mm]
Fluid
Quick Reference
Guide
Proof Pressure
1.5MPa
1.0MPa
0.08MPa
Piston speed
50 to 1000mm/s
Ambient and
fluid temperature
note)
C55
Cushion
+1.0
+1.4
Bracket type
C85
Note) Load limits exist depending upon piston speed when locked, mounting direction and operating pressure.
Lock actuation
C76
Lock Specifications
Spring lock (exhaust lock)
0.25MPa
0.20MPa
Unlocking pressure
Locking pressure
Max. operating pressure
Locking direction
CP95
1.0MPa
2 Two-way
Standard Stroke
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500
700
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500
800
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600
-X
(Made to Order)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Max. Stroke*
C95
1000
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600,700,800
25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,250,300,350,400,450,500,600,700,800
Stopping Accuracy
Spring lock
[mm]
300
500
1000
0.3
0.6
1.0
2.0
Model Selection
Procedures
Locking system
D(Auto Switch)
32
40
50
63
80
100
552
882
1370
2160
3430
5390
6-23
Series
C95N
C95N Cylinder
Part No: Mounting Bracket, Mounting Accessories
Description
32
Bore size
40
50
63
80
100
Foot(1)
Flange
Single rear clevis
Double rear clevis
Double rear clevis
(for ES accessory)
Angled rear clevis
with ball joint
Angled rear clevis
Trunnion pivot
bracket
Rod clevis
Piston rod ball joint
Floating joint
32
40
50
63
Basic type B
1.40
2.15
3.53
Trunnion T
0.15
0.26
0.34
0.11
0.16
0.26
100
5.18
8.99
12.72
0.57
1.03
1.71
0.27
0.42
0.56
80
L
F
C
D
32
0.16
0.20
0.16
0.20
40
0.20
0.23
0.23
0.32
50
0.38
0.47
0.37
0.45
63
0.46
0.58
0.60
0.71
80
0.89
1.30
1.07
1.28
100
1.09
1.81
1.73
2.11
Example:
:
Cylinder 40 mm, Stroke 100 mm, bracket D
100
Weight = 0.84 kg + (0.16 kg x
) + 0.32 kg = 1.48 kg
50
Construction Principles
Spring lock (exhaust lock)
The spring force which acts upon the taper ring is
magnified by a wedge effect, and is conveyed to all of
the numeous steel balls which are arranged in two
crcles. These act on the brake shoe holder and
brake, which locks the piston rod by tightening
against it with a large force.
Unlocking is accomplished when air pressure is
supplied to the unlocking port. The brake piston and
taper ring oppose the spring force, moving to the
right side, and the ball retainer strikes the cover
section A. The braking force is released as the steel
balls are removed from the taper ring by the ball
retainer.
Locked condition
6-24
Unlocked condition
Series
C95N
Construction
r y #0 $0 $2 w
$3
#8 @9
Quick Reference
Guide
$9 !3 !4 @3 #5 t @7 $5 !5 @4 !8 @0 !7 !9 i @2 q
C
C55
#3
!2
63
#1
Section B
50
#2
Section C
80, 100
Rod cover
Aluminium alloy
Head cover
Aluminium alloy
Cover
Aluminium alloy
Cylinder tubing
Aluminium alloy
Hard annodised
Piston rod
Carbon steel
Piston
Aluminium alloy
Chromated
Taper Ring
Carbon steel
Heat treated
Ball retainer
Special resin
Piston guide
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Carbon steel
Heat treated
Aluminium alloy
Hard annodised
40
50
!1
63
Release piston
32
80
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
100
Release piston bushing
Unlocking cam
Carbon steel
Glossy chromated
Washer
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Brake spring
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Clip A
Stainless steel
Clip B
Stainless steel
Steel ball A
Carbon steel
Steel ball B
Carbon steel
Tooth ring
Stainless steel
@9
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
$0
$1
$2
$3
$4
$5
$6
$7
$8
$9
Description
Cushion valve
Wear ring
Material
Carbon steel
Note
Nickel plated
PUR
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
BC element
Tie-rod nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Piston seal
NBR
NBR
Rod seal A
NBR
Cushion seal
NBR
NBR
Piston gasket
NBR
NBR
Rod seal B
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Model Selection
Procedures
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6
@7
@8
No.
Polyurethane rubber
Damper
C type retaining ring for unlocking cam shaft Carbon steel
C type retaining ring for taper ring Carbon steel
Brake shoe
Tie rod
Carbon steel
Bushing
Lead-bronze casting
Cushion ring
Brass
CP95
Note
C95
Material
-X
(Made to Order)
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
Parts list
Description
D(Auto Switch)
Parts list
No.
32
40
80, 100
$4 @8 #9 @6 #4
C85
80
100
$1 e $8 o $7 !1 @1 !6 @5 u !0 $6 #7 #6
!22
C76
!2
Section A
Chromated
6-25
Series
C95N
Dimensions
Basic type ( B)
GA
BP
E1
? B2
R
??
GD
PL
GC
SW
EE
EE
SW1
BG
VD
H1
I9
VB
I12
Q
AM
4xRT
GE
BN
WH
AM
22
24
32
32
40
40
Be
B2
11
30
46
35
52
40
65
45
75
45
95
55 114
Bore size
KK
(mm)
M10 x 1.25
32
M12 x 1.25
40
M16 x 1.5
50
M16 x 1.5
63
M20 x 1.5
80
M20 x 1.5
100
6-26
BG
BN
BP
I8
I9
I 12
164
182
195
224
259
289
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6.5
8
8
10
10
GF
G
EE
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
E1
GA
46
52
65
75
95
114
54
63
75
90
102
116
13
13
14
14
20
20
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
83
91
104.5
119.5
150
170
RT
SW
SW1
37 32.5 M6
13
14 41.5 38 M6
15.5 47.5 46.5 M8
16.5 55 56.5 M8
61
19
72 M10
68
19
89 M10
10
13
16
16
21
21
17
19
24
24
30
30
97 G1/8
16
16 104 G1/8
16 120.5 G1/4
16 134.5 G1/4
16 169 G1/4
16 189 G1/4
PL
BG
18+ Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
4xRT
34 6.5
39.5 8
9
47
55.5 8.5
61.5 10.5
69.5 10.5
GC
GD
VA
GE
GL 1
H1
12
12
15
12
18
20
48
54
69
69
86
91
6
8
11
11
13
16
WB
WH
ZZ
4
6.5
4
9
5 10.5
9
12
11.5 14
17
15
26
30
37
37
46
51
216
240
268
297
349
384
GF
GL
VA
VB
VD
4
4
4
4
4
4
13
16.5
20
23
33
37.5
4
4
6
6
8
8
WA
WA
WB
WB
GL
R
??
B
D
WA
KK
C95N
Series
Dimensions
BP
B2
GD
SW
PL
GC
SW
SW1
EE
EE
D
B
WA
KK
GL1
WB
GL
B
D
??R
KK
BG
4 x RT
VD
H1
VB
Q
I12
AM
C55
??R
GA
WH
VA
BG
H1
GF
GE
BN
I9
4 x RT
C85
E1
Quick Reference
Guide
I12
18 + Stroke
ZY + Stroke
AM
H + Stroke
Bore size
KK
(mm)
M10 x 1.25
32
M12 x 1.25
40
M16 x 1.5
50
M16 x 1.5
63
M20 x 1.5
80
M20 x 1.5
100
BN
BP
97 G1/8
16
16 104 G1/8
16 120.5 G1/4
16 134.5 G1/4
16 169 G1/4
16 189 G1/4
I2
I8
I9
I 12
15
17
24
24
30
32
164
182
195
224
259
289
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6.5
8
8
10
10
EE
12
16
20
20
25
30
G1/8
G1/4
G1/4
G3/8
G3/8
G1/2
E1
GA
46
52
65
75
95
114
54
63
75
90
102
116
13
13
14
14
20
20
27
27
31.5
31.5
38
38
83
91
104.5
119.5
150
170
RT
SW
SW1
37 32.5 M6
13
14 41.5 38 M6
15.5 47.5 46.5 M8
16.5 55 56.5 M8
61
19
72 M10
68
19
89 M10
10
13
16
16
21
21
17
19
24
24
30
30
PL
GC
GD
GE
GF
GL 1
H1
12
12
15
12
18
20
48
54
69
69
86
91
6
8
11
11
13
16
WB
WH
ZY
4
6.5
4
9
5 10.5
9
12
11.5 14
17
15
26
30
37
37
46
51
260
290
333
362
431
471
GL
34 6.5
39.5 8
9
47
55.5 8.5
61.5 10.5
69.5 10.5
VA
VB
VD
4
4
4
4
4
4
13
16.5
20
23
33
37.5
4
4
6
6
8
8
WA
C95
BG
-X
(Made to Order)
22
24
32
32
40
40
Be
B2
11
30
46
35
52
40
65
45
75
45
95
55 114
D(Auto Switch)
AM
Model Selection
Procedures
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
CP95
C76
6-27
Series
C95N
SA + stroke
Z +1/2 + stroke
Trunnion Type
ZF + stroke
XD + stroke
Bore size
(mm)
AB
7
32
9
40
9
50
9
63
12
80
14
100
6-28
AH
AD
AT
CB1)
32
36
45
50
63
71
10
11
12
12
14
16
4
4
5
5
6
6
26
28
32
40
50
60
CD
E1
H9
48
10
55
12
68
12
80
16
16 100
20 120
E2
EB EW 2) FB
56 65
65 75
77 80
92 90
100 110
120 140
26
28
32
40
50
60
1) +0.03/+0.1
2) -0.2/-0.6
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
TR
UB
UF
UW
XA
XD
ZF
I1
32
36
45
50
63
75
45
52
60
70
90
110
87
101
120
135
153
178
49
58
71
87
110
136
16
20
25
25
30
35
214
240
264
293
346
381
18
22
24
28
34
40
7
9
9
9
12
14
LY
MF
MR
SA
12
15
15
20
20
25
59
67.5
82.5
95
114
129
10
10
12
12
16
16
9.5
12
12
16
16
20
38
46
52
62
63
75
212
238
259
288
341
371
TD
e9
12
16
16
20
20
25
TF
TL
TM
72
83
100
115
126
150
12
16
16
20
20
25
50
63
75
90
110
132
Series C95N
2. [Vertical]
load in direction
of rod extension
1. Basic Circuits
1. [Horizontal]
Forward
in direction
[ ofLoad
rod retraction ]
Regulator
w/check
valve
3 ports
normally
closed
Sol.A
pressure
centre
Sol.C
Sol.B
Sol.C
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Action
Forward
Locked stop
Unlocked
Forward
Backward
Locked stop
Unlocked
Backward
2. [Vertical]
Load in direction
of rod extension
Load in direction
of rod retraction
Sol.C
0.5s or
more
0 to
0.5s
Sol.C
Sol.B
Sol.A
0.5s or
more
Sol.A
0 to
0.5s
C55
Backward
Sol.A Sol.B
ON ON
OFF OFF
ON OFF
ON ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
Sol.B
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
Caution
Warning
Manual Unlocking
Sol.C
Sol.B
Caution
1. A 3 position pressure centre solenoid valve and regulator with
check valve can be replaced with two 3 port normally open
valves and a regulator with relief function.
Cylinder side
CP95
Sol.A
C95
Sol.A
Cylinder side
Release psiton
Unlocking cam
Locked condition
[Principle]
1. [Horizontal]
W
3 ports
normally open
Sol.C
Model Selection
Procedures
[Example]
-X
(Made to Order)
Sol.B
D(Auto Switch)
Sol.C
C76
Caution
1. The unlocking cam provided on the C95N Series is an
emergency unlocking mechanism only.
During an emergency when the air supply is cut off, it is used to
alleviate a problem by forcibly pushing the release piston back to
release the lock. However, take note that the sliding resistance of
the piston rod will be high compared to unlocking with air pressure.
2. When installing into equipment or machinery, etc., in cases
where it will be necessary to hold an unlocked condition for
an extended time, air pressure of 0.25MPa or more should be
applied to the unlocking port.
Sol.B
regulator with
relief function
Sol.A
3 ports
normally closed
6-29
Series
C95N
Caution
Step 1
Graph 1
10
700
600 Strok
e
S
500 troke
Str
oke
400
Str
oke
300
Str
oke
200
Str
oke
Example)
5
4
V'
W
Cylinder stroke
Movement distance
of load
[Example]
100
Str
oke
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
100
200
Selection Example
Load weight: m=50kg
Movement distance: Stroke=500mm
Movement time: t=2s
Load condition: Vertical downward=Load in direction of rod extension
Operating pressure: P=0.4MPa
Step 1: From graph 1 find the maximum movement speed of the load
Maximum speed V: approx 350mm/s
Step 2: Select graph 6 based upon the load condition and operating
pressure, and then from the intersection of the maximum speed
V=350mm/s found in step 1, and the load weight m=50kg
63 selecta C95NDB63 or larger bore size.
300
400
500
1000
Step 2
Load condition
Operating pressure
from 0.3MPa
Graph 2
from 0.4MPa
Graph 3
from 0.5MPa
Graph 4
from 0.3MPa
Graph 5
from 0.4MPa
Graph 6
from 0.5MPa
Graph 7
m
F
m
F
6-30
Series
C95N
Selection Graphs
Graph 2
0.3MPa P<0.4MPa
Graph 5
1000
50
40
30
32
20
10
100
32
10
300
400
500
50
40
20
5
4
3
200
63
50
40
30
5
4
3
1
100
100
100
80
C55
50
40
100
1
100
1000
200
0.4MPa P<0.5MPa
0.4MPa P<0.5MPa
20
10
100
63
50
40
30
50
40
[Example]
10
5
4
3
200
300
400
500
32
20
5
4
3
1
100
1000
200
500
1000
Graph 7
0.5MPa P
500
400
300
63
50
40
200
32
50
40
30
20
10
100
50
40
30
1000
63
50
40
32
10
5
4
3
500
100
80
20
5
4
3
200
300
400
Maximum speed: V [mm /s]
D(Auto Switch)
1000
100
80
400
Graph 4
1
100
300
Model Selection
Procedures
1
100
C76
100
80
C95
32
200
1
100
-X
(Made to Order)
50
50
40
500
400
300
63
63
50
40
30
100
1000
CP95
100
80
100
200
500
1000
200
500
400
300
400
Graph 6
1000
1000
300
Graph 3
500
400
300
Quick Reference
Guide
200
63
C85
200
Load weight: m [kg]
500
400
300
100
80
500
400
300
0.3MPa P<0.4MPa
1000
200
300
400
500
1000
6-31
Series C95
D-A5/A6
Reed switch
Grommet
D-A59W
D-F5/J5
Grommet
D-F5W/J59W
Solid state switch
D-F5BAL
D-F5F
D-F5NTL
Grommet (Timer)
D-A5, D-A6
No. of
auto switches
2 (On different
faces or same face)
D-A59W
D-F5/J5
D-F5NTL
D-F5W
D-J59W
D-F5BAL
D-F5F
D-F5LF
Center trunnion
32 40 50 63 80 100 32 40 50 63 80 100
15
2 (On different
faces or same face)
20
15
2 (On different
faces or same face)
15
10
2 (On different
faces or same face)
15
10
2 (On different
faces or same face)
15
10
60
20
25
60
70
25
60
70
25
70
75
25
70
75
D-A5/D-A6
D-A59W
(mm)
D-F5
D-J5
D-F5 W
D-J59W
D-F5BAL
D-F5NTL
Bore size
(mm)
D-A5
D-A6
D-A59W
D-F5, D-J5
D-F5 W, D-J59W
D-F5BAL, D-F5NTL
Ht
Hs
Ht
Hs
32
10.5
14.5
17
4.5
21
8.5
22
9.5
32
24.5
35
25
32.5
40
21.5
25.5
28
4.5
32
8.5
33
9.5
40
27.5
38.5
27.5
36.5
50
23
27
2.5
29.5
33.5
34.5
10
50
34.5
43.5
34
41
63
28
32
2.5
34.5
38.5
39.5
10
63
39.5
48.5
39
46
80
28
2.5
22
6.5
24.5
28.5
13
29.5
14
80
46.5
55
46.5
52.5
100
28
2.5
32
6.5
34.5
38.5
13
39.5
14
100
55
62
55
59.5
6-32
Series
C95
Auto Switches
Quick Reference
Guide
Reed: D-Z 7
D-Z 8
C55
Two directions
Direct mount
type auto switch
One direction
Watchmakers
(precision)
screw driver
Phillips screw
driver
32, 40
BMB4-032
50, 63
BMB4-050
32, 40 BMB5-032
50, 63
BA7-040
80, 100 BA7-063
Auto switch
Accessory
Reed-Switch
D-Z7
D-Z80
Screw
(M4 x 6L)
2 pcs.
Solid state
D-Y5
D-Y6
D-Y7
BA4-063
80, 100
Z76
Reed-Switch
Z73
Z80
Y59A
Y7P
Y59B
Y7NW
Y7PW
Y7BW
Y7BA
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
Y69A
Y7PV
Y69B
Y7NWV
Y7PWV
Y7BWV
Load voltage
Special
function
Electrical
Entry
Grommet
Indicator
light
Yes
No
Diagnostic
indication
(2-colour indicator)
Grommet
Yes
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
DC
24V
Connector
and
Grommet
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
5V
12V
12V
3 wire (NPN)
Yes
AC
5V, 12V
5V
12V
12V
24V
5V
12V
2-wire
Water resistant
(2colour indicator)
Solid state
Switch
3-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
Solid state
Switch
Wiring
(output)
24V
5V,
12V
12V
100V
100V
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable loads
IC
IC
Relay,
PLC
IC
IC
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
Relay
PLC
6-33
-X
(Made to Order)
Order No.
C95
D(Auto Switch)
Bore size
(mm)
CP95
Hexagon
wrench
(width
across flats
2.5mm)
Model Selection
Procedures
Tie-rod mount
type auto switch
(convential)
C76
Smaller size
C85
Easier handling
C95
Series
Auto Switches
All models
Bore Size
[mm]
Hs
(W)
[mm]
D-Y6, D-Y7
Ht
Hs
(W) V
Ht
D-Y7BA
Hs
Ht
D-Z7
D-Z8
D-Y5/Y7
D-Y6/Y7
[mm]
(W)
D-Y7BA
(W) V
32
14
1.5
25.5
23
26.5
23
30
23
32
7.5
5.5
3.5
40
25
1.5
29.5
26
30
26
34
26
40
8.5
5.5
3.5
50
26.5
33.5
31
34.5
31
38
31
50
7.5
3.5
63
31.5
39
36
40
36
43
36
63
9.5
7.5
80
31.5
47.5
45
48.5
45
52
45
80
9.5
6.5
4.5
100
31.5
55.5
53.5
56.5
53.5
60
53.5
100
10.5
5.5
Minimum length
[mm]
with bracket T
Auto Switch
D-Z7/Z8,
D-Y5/Y7
D-Y6/Y7
D-Y7BA
(W)
(W) V
32
40
50
63
80
100
80
85
90
90
95
100
60
55
85
90
65
90
70
100
75
105
85
110
Caution!
When tightening the auto switch mounting screw, use a
watchmakers screw driver with a handle diameter of
about 5 to 6mm.
Watchmakers (precision)
Furthermore, use a tightening torque of 0.05 to 0.1 Nm.
screw driver
As a rule, it should be turned about 90 from the point
at which tightening can be felt. Use a tightening torque Hexagon socket head set screw
M4 x 6 L
of 1 to 1.2 Nm for the hexagon socket head set screws
(M4 x 0.7).
1. Place the mounting bracket on the cylinder tie-rod, and secure it
in the detection position with the set screw so that the bottom of
the mounting bracket makes firm contact with the cylinder tube.
(Use a hexagon wrench)
2. Insert an auto switch into the switch mounting groove of the
mounting bracket, and place it in the approximate auto switch
mounting position.
3. After confirming the detection position, secure the auto switch by
tightening the mounting screw which is included with it.
4. Return to step 2 to change the detection position.
Note) In order to protect the auto switch, install it so that its body is
housed at least 15mm inside the switch mounting groove.
6-34
Auto Switch
Auto switch mounting screw
Switch mounting bracket
Series C95
Operating Precautions
Bolt
Caution
Width
across flats
Tightening
torque (Nm)
32, 40
MB-32-48-C1247
4.9
50, 63
MB-50-48-C1249
11
25
80,
Foot
MB-80-48AC1251
100
Others
MB-80-48BC1251
MB-63-10-C1250
JIS 4648
Hex spanner wrench 2.5
JIS 4648
Hex spanner wrench 4
C76
Socket wrench
CP95
2.5
C95
MB-32-10-C1247
-X
(Made to Order)
32, 40, 50
D(Auto Switch)
Width
across flats
Model Selection
Procedures
Caution
C55
Warning
Quick Reference
Guide
Adjustment
6-35
Symbol
Specifications/Descriptions
Page
CJP
CJ2
-XA0 to A30
-XB5
-XB6
(1)
(2)
-XB7
(3)
(2)
-XB9
(1)
(1)
-XB10
-XB11
Long stroke
-XB12
-XB13
(1)
!0
-XC3
(1)
!1
-XC4
!2
-XC5
!3
-XC6
!4
-XC7
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. made of stainless steel
!5
-XC8
!6
-XC9
!7
-XC10
!8
-XC11
!9
-XC12
Tandem cylinder
@0
-XC13
@1
-XC14
@2
-XC15
N@3
-XC17
@4
-XC18
NPT port
@5
-XC20
@6
-XC22
@7
-XC24
@8
-XC25
@9
-XC27
Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made of stainless steel
#0
-XC28
#1
-XC29
#2
-XC30
Front trunnion
#3
-XC34
#4
-XC35
#5
-XC36
#6
-XC37
#7
-XC38
#8
-XC42
#9
-XC51
$0
-XC52
$1
-XC56
$2
-XC57
6-36
CM2
CG1
MB
CA1
CS1
C95 CP95
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
CD
(3)
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
C95
125, 160, 200, 250
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Action
Standard variations
Type
Basic
Single
rod
Non
-lube
Built-in
magnet
Stainless
steel rod
Option
Heat
resistant
Bore
(mm)
Page
125
160
200
250
D(Auto Switch)
Series
6-38
Model Selection
Procedures
Series Variations
6-37
Series
C95
125, 160, 200, 250
How to Order
Without auto switch
C95S
B 125 100
Number of
auto switches
A53 S
Nil
S
3
n
Built-in magnet
Mounting style
B
L
F
G
C
D
T
Stroke (mm)
Bore size
125
160
200
250
Refer to Standard
Stroke on page
6-40.
125 mm
160 mm
200 mm
250 mm
2 pcs.
1 pc.
3 pcs.
n pcs.
Auto switch
Without auto switch
Nil
For the applicable auto
switch model, refer to the
table below.
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Wiring
(Output)
3-wire
(Equiv. to NPN)
DC
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No
2-wire
24 V
3-wire
No
Terminal
conduit
5V
12 V
2-wire
5 V, 12 V
12 V
5V
12 V
5 V, 12 V
24 V
Yes
12 V
DIN terminal
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
Diagnostic indication
(2-color)
Water resistant (2-color)
With timer
Grommet
Diagnostic output (2-color)
Yes
Diagnostic indication
(2-color)
Water resistant (2-color)
Terminal
conduit
Yes
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
M9N
M9P
M9B
100 V, 200 V
100 V, 200 V
12 V
5 V, 12 V
24 V
5 V, 12 V
12 V
5 V, 12 V
2-wire
12 V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
5 V, 12 V
12 V
24V
5V,12V
12V
Applicable load
IC
IC
Relay, PLC
IC
IC
Note)
Relay, PLC
PLC
Note)
Note)
Note)
Relay, PLC
IC
IC
Relay, PLC
IC
IC
Note)
IC
Relay, PLC
IC
Note)
IC
Relay
PLC
6-38
A33
A34
A44
G39
K39
12 V
2-wire
A53
A54
A67
A64
A59W
Z76
Z73
Z80
F59
F5P
J51
J59
F59W
F5PW
J59W
F5BAL
F5NTL
F59F
Y59A
Y59B
Y7P
Y7NW
Y7PW
Y7BW
Y7BAL
5 V, 12 V
5 V, 12 V
3 wire (PNP)
2 wire
A56
100 V, 200 V
200 V or less
AC 100
100 V or less
3 wire (NPN)
Grommet
24 V
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
3-wire (NPN)
4-wire (NPN)
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (PNP)
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
AC
125
160
200
BS1-125 BS1-160 BS1-200
BT-08
BT-16
BT-16
BA4-080 BS4-160 BS4-160
BA7-080 BS5-160 BS5-160
250
BT-20
Series
C95
Accessory
Mounting Accessory, Cylinder
Rod/Head side flange
Quick Reference
Guide
Bore
size
(mm)
125
F5125
D5125
C5125
160
F5160
D5160
C5160
200
F5200
D5200
C5200
250
F5250
D5250
C5250
Foot
C76
C85
C55
CP95
Bore
size
(mm)
L5125
160
L5160
200
L5200
250
L5250
-X
(Made to Order)
125
C95
KJ
JA
Floating joint
D(Auto Switch)
GKM
Bore
size
(mm)
Model Selection
Procedures
125
GKM30-54
KJ27D
JA125-27-200
160
GKM35-54
KJ36D
JA160-36-200
200
GKM35-54
KJ36D
JA160-36-200
250
GKM40-84
KJ42D
6-39
Series
C95
Specifications
125
160
Action
Air
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
Max. operating pressure
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to 70C (No freezing)
With auto switch: 10 to 60C (No freezing)
Lubrication
50 to 700 mm/sec
50 to 500 mm/sec
+1.4
+1.8
Up to 250:+1.0
0 , 251 to 1000: 0 , 1001 to 1500: 0
Cushion
JIS Class 2
Thread tolerance
G 3/4
G 1/2
G1
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style,
Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
Port size
Mounting
250
Double acting
Fluid
JIS Symbol
Double acting
200
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Max.
stroke
125
1600
160
1600
200
2000
250
2400
Theoretical Output
160
200
250
32
40
40
50
IN
OUT
12272
2454
0.2
IN
11468
2294
OUT
20106
4021
IN
18850
3770
OUT
31416
6283
IN
30159
6032
OUT
49087
IN
47124
125
OUT
(N)
Weight/Aluminum Tube
Bore size (mm)
Basic style
Basic weight
160
200
250
7.45
14.54
20.20
37.17
Foot style
2.60
4.90
7.76
15.00
Flange style
4.10
2.45
11.75
20.29
4.15
6.90
9.10
18.60
4.25
6.30
9.25
18.46
Trunnion style
2.98
4.50
7.23
14.40
0.54
0.83
0.90
1.60
1.20
1.62
1.62
2.76
1.84
3.92
3.92
6.69
6-40
(kg)
125
Series
Construction
C95
11 1
3 6-1 19
15 5 14 17 13 6-2 2
12 10 18
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
4 16
C85
8 7
125
C76
125
Qty.
1
1
Note
Only 125
Only 125
No.
q
w
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Material
Aluminum casted
Aluminum casted
Qty.
Note
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
8
1
2
C95
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
160 to 250
Material
Aluminum die-casted
Aluminum die-casted
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Rolled steel
Rolled steel
Carbon steel
Steel
Steel
Steel wire
Lead-bronze casted
Steel for spring
Urethane
Resin
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Only 125
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
-X
(Made to Order)
6-1
6-2
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Cushion ring A
Cushion ring B
Tie-rod
Tie-rod nut
Rod end nut
Cushion valve
Bushing
Snap ring
Cushion seal
Wear ring
Piston seal
Rod seal
Cylinder tube gasket
Cushion valve seal
Piston gasket
Magnet ring
D(Auto Switch)
No.
q
w
e
r
t
CP95
Component Parts
Model Selection
Procedures
6-41
Series
C95
Port
Cushion
Valve
Stroke
Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
AM
125
160
200
250
54
72
72
84
6-42
B D
e11
60 32
65 40
75 40
90 50
EE
PL
RT
L12
KK
SW
BG
G (Min.) L8
VD VA WA
WB
WH
ZZ
R L2 L9
G 1/2
G 3/4
G 3/4
G1
19
30
35
31
M12 x 1.75
M16 x 2
M16 x 2
M20 x 2.5
13
15
15
20
M27 x 2
M36 x 2
M36 x 2
M42 x 2
27
36
36
46
38
55
57
59
10
8
15
20
15
25
25
28
65
80
95
105
285
338
353
399
136
180
220
270
110
140
175
220
20
27
27
29
160
180
180
200
6
6
6
10
17
15
18
20
40
50
55
65
6
0
0
0
Series
C95
Quick Reference
Guide
Stroke
C55
Stroke
C76
C85
XV + 1/2 stroke
CP95
Stroke
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
Head side
Head side
single clevis style (C) double clevis style (D)
Bore
(mm)
125
160
200
250
Model Selection
Procedures
Stroke
E1
R W MF ZF FB CD EB
Max. 157 90 45
Max. 195 115 60
Max. 238 135 70
Max. 290 165 80
H9
20
20
25
25
245
280
300
330
16
18
22
26
25
30
30
40
XD UB CB EW MR
h14
H14
0.5
1.2
130
170
170
200
70
90
90
110
70
90
90
110
Max. 26
Max. 31
Max. 31
Max. 41
TR
AO
90
115
135
165
Max. 25
Max. 25
Max. 35
Max. 40
AT XA SA AH AB L1
8
9
12
14.5
270
320
345
380
250 90
300 115
320 135
350 165
16
18
22
26
XV
Max. 50 145
Max. 50 170
Max. 50 185
Max. 60 205
Z TL TD TM
199
242
257
289
h14
e8
25
32
32
40
25
32
32
40
h14
UW
TF
UF
E2
6-43
Series
C95
Bore size
(mm)
6-44
E1
EW
TG1 FL
125
140
70
110
160
180
90
140
200
220
90
250
270
110
MR
d2
R1
E2
UB
CB
25
25
13.5
10
140
130
70
30
25
18
13
180
170
90
75
30
25
18
13
220
170
90
90
40
40
22
16.5 270
200
110
l1
I2
d1
CD
50
10
60
55
10
65
175
60
11
220
70
11
11
Series
C95
Part no.
Bore size
(mm)
GKM30-54
125
GKM35-54
160/200
GKM40-84
250
+0.60
+0.15
+0.60
M36 x 2 35
+0.15
+0.60
M42 x 2 40
+0.15
f
h11
L1
max.
c
min.
a
max.
L
min.
110
30
155
54
55
45
144
35
201
54
70
57
168
40
245
84
85
77
d6
max.
70
80
90
b1
h12
37
43
49
L
min.
51
56
60
L3
15
16
4
35
55
46
C55
M27 x 2 30
Quick Reference
Guide
d3
KJ27D
KJ36D
KJ42D
125
160/200
250
M27 x 2
M36 x 2
M42 x 2
d1
H9
30
35
40
h
110
125
142
C76
Bore size
(mm)
CP95
Part no.
C85
Floating Joint JA
C
Load (kN)
Weight (g)
123
34
38
66
13
24
20
41
24
28
1500
160, 200
M36 x 2
JA160-36-200
178
51
55
96
16
55
24
55
42
71
4700
Angle
5
-X
(Made to Order)
JA125-27-200
D(Auto Switch)
M27 x 2
Model Selection
Procedures
Part no.
125
C95
Steel
6-45
Series C95
Reed switch
A6
n = 2, 4, 6, 8 n = 2, 4, 6, 8
20
2
20 + 55(n-2)/2
A59W
n
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
15
15
20
15
1
20
10
1, 2
F5(W)/J5/J59W
20 + 55(n-2)/2 10 + 55(n-2)/2
n
F5BAL/F59F
n = 2, 4, 6, 8 n = 2, 4, 6, 8
15
15
25
15
1, 2
25 + 55(n-2)/2 15 + 55(n-2)/2
F5NTL
n
n = 2, 4, 6, 8 n = 2, 4, 6, 8
10
10
10
1
100
100
100
2 (Same side)
35
35
35
2 (Different sides)
A3
100 + 100(n-2)
K3
n (Same side) n = 2, 3, 4, 5
G3
35 + 30(n-2)
n (Different sides) n = 2, 3, 4, 5
10
55
35
55 + 55(n-2)
A44
n (Same side) n = 2, 3, 4, 5
35 + 30(n-2)
n (Different sides) n = 2, 3, 4, 5
10
1, 2
10 + 40(n-2)/2
Z7/Z80
n
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
10
1, 2
Y59/Y7P
10 + 40(n-2)/2
Y7W
n
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
10
1, 2
Y69/Y7PV
10 + 30(n-2)/2
Y7WV
n
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
15
1, 2
10 + 45(n-2)/2
Y7BAL
n
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
1
2 (Same side)
2 (Different sides)
6-46
10
55
35
10
55
35
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
125
165
165 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
175
175 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
175
170
175 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
185
185 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
130
130
130
130 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
130 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
135
135
135
135 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
135 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
150
150 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
150
150 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
120
120 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
160
160 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
Center trunnion
200
160
125
125
125 + 55(n-4)/2
125 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
135
135
135 + 55(n-4)/2
135 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
135
135
135
135
135 + 55(n-4)/2
135 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
145
150
145 + 55(n-4)/2
150 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
140
140
140
140
140
140
140 + 100(n-2)
140 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
140 + 100(n-2)
140 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
100
100
100
100
100
100
100 + 100(n-2)
100 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
100 + 100(n-2)
100 + 100(n-2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
n = 2, 4, 6, 8
110
120
110 + 55(n-4)/2
120 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
110
110
110 + 55(n-4)/2
110 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
80
85
80 + 55(n-4)/2
85 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
120
120
120 + 55(n-4)/2
120 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
250
145
145 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
155
155 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
155
155
155 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16
165
165 + 55(n-4)/2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16...
Series
C95
Quick Reference
Guide
125
160
200
250
D-A5
D-A6
A
45.5
19.5
17
20
B
6.5
18.5
17
30
D-A59W
A
49.5
23.5
21
24
B
10.5
22.5
21
34
D-F5, D-F5W
D-J5, D-J59W
D-F59F, D-F5BAL
A
52
26
23.5
26.5
B
13
25
23.5
36.5
D-F5NTL
A
57
31
28.5
31.5
B
18
30
28.5
41.5
A
49
23
20.5
B
10
22
20.5
D-A3, D-G39
D-A44, D-K39
A
45.5
19.5
17
B
6.5
18.5
17
C85
Bore
size
(mm)
C55
125
160
200
250
D-A5
D-A6
D-A59W
Hs
71.5
90
102.5
127
Ht
66.5
86
104
128
Ht
66.5
86
104
128
D-A3, D-G39
D-K39
Hs
116
134.5
154
Ht
D-Z7, D-Y59
D-Z80, D-Y7P
D-Y7W
D-A44
Hs
126
144.5
164
Ht
Hs
67.5
84.5
100.5
Ht
65
83
100.5
D-Y69
D-Y7PV
D-Y7WV
Hs
68.5
84.5
100.5
Ht
65
83
100.5
D-Y7BAL
Hs
72
89.5
103
Ht
65
83
100.5
CP95
Bore
size
(mm)
C76
Switch Hysteresis
C95
125 to 200
250
-X
(Made to Order)
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in How to Order, the following auto
switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to page 8-1.
Solid state switch
Model
D-F5NTL
D-Y69A/Y69B/Y7PV
D-Y7NWV/Y7PWV/Y7BWV
Electrical entry
Grommet (In-line)
Grommet (Perpendicular)
Features
With timer
2-color indication
D(Auto Switch)
Type
Model Selection
Procedures
With pre-wire connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to page 8-1.
Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to
page 8-1.
6-47
Series C95
Adjustment
Warning
1. Do not open the cushion valve above the stopper.
Cushion valves are provided with a retaining ring (125 to
250) as a stopping mechanism, and the cushion valve should
not be opened above that point.
If air is supplied and operation started without confirming the
above condition, the cushion valve may be ejected from the
cover.
Bore size (mm) Cushion valve
125, 160,
200, 250
Width
across flats
Socket wrench
JIS 4648
Hex spanner wrench 4
MB-A2-10-EA064
Bolt
Width
across flats
125
10
30.1
99
160, 200
250
6-48
M16 x 2 x 30l
14
Foot
17
Others
17
193.5
Made to Order
Common Specifications
Quick Reference
Guide
Ordeer
Mad
Page
C95
q
-XA0 to A30
-XB6
(3)
-XB7
(3)
-XB9
CP95 C85
C76
C55
7-2
7-4
(2)
(2)
7-5
(2)
(2)
7-6
-XB13
(1)
(1)
7-7
-XC4
(3)
7-8
-XC6
(3)
7-9
-XC7
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. made of stainless steel
-XC10
(3)
7-11
!0
-XC11
(3)
7-12
!1
-XC12
Tandem cylinder
(3)
7-13
!2
-XC14
(3)
7-14
!3
-XC18
NPT port
(3)
7-15
!4
-XC22
(3)
7-16
!5
-XC35
(3)
7-17
C85
Symbol
7-10
C76
Spec. No.
C95
CP95
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
7-1
Ordeer
Mad
X A0
Symbol of rod end shape
SMC will make appropriate arrangements if no dimensional, tolerance, or finish instructions are given in the diagram.
Subtract 1mm from the rod diameter for the dimension marked "". Enter any special dimension you desire.
Applicable cylinder
Symbol:
Symbol:
A0
Symbol:
A1
Symbol:
A10
Symbol:
A11
A0
Symbol:
A1
Symbol:
A10
Symbol:
A11
C85
C76
Non-rotating
rod cylinder
C85K
C76K
7-2
Symbol
-XA0 to XA30
X A1
C95
X A1
C76
X A1
CP95
X A1
C55
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
-XA0 to XA30
C76
C85
SMC will make appropriate arrangements if no dimensional, tolerance, or finish instructions are given in the diagram.
25.2mm
Dimensions of rod diameter "D" marked "" is D
D>25.4mm . Enter any special dimension you desire.
Note) A24 and A25 for series CQ2 compact cylinder are not available. Contact SMC for bore size 12 to 25.
A6
Symbol:
A7
Symbol:
A8
Symbol:
A9
Symbol:
A10
CP95
Symbol:
A11
Symbol:
A12
Symbol:
A13
Symbol:
A14
Symbol:
A15
Symbol:
A16
Symbol:
A17
Symbol:
A18
Symbol:
A19
Symbol:
A20
Symbol:
A21
Symbol:
A22
Symbol:
A23
Symbol:
A24
Symbol:
A25
Symbol:
A26
Symbol:
A27
Symbol:
A28
Symbol:
A29
Symbol:
A30
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Symbol:
7-3
Ordeer
Mad
Symbol
-XB6
C95
An air cylinder in which the materials of the seals and the grease have
been changed so that the cylinder can be operated at high ambient
temperatures of up to 150C.
Note 1) Make sure to use without lubrication.
Note 2) Contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for this
cylinder, which differ from those of the standard cylinder.
Note 3) It is not possible to manufacture this cylinder with an auto switch.
Specifications
Applicable cylinder
Series
Action
Bore size (mm)
Range of ambient temp.
Air cylinder/Standard
C85
C76
C95
CP95
C85, C85W
C85R, C85K
C76, C76W
C76R, C76K
C95,
C95W
CP95,
CP95W
Fluorine rubber
Grease
7-4
Packing material
Additional specifications
and dimensions, refer to
32, 40
Details on
chapter C76
Details on
chapter C95
XB6
Details on
chapter CP95
Warning
Precaution
Be aware that smoking cigarettes, etc. after your hands have come into
contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
hazardous to humans.
C85
C76
Mounting
Bore size
Stroke
XB7
An air cylinder in which the materials of the seals and the grease
have been changed so that the cylinder can be operated at
ambient temperatures as low as -40C.
Note 1) Make sure to use without lubrication.
Note 2) To prevent the moisture from freezing, use dry air such
as by using a heatless air dryer.
Note 3) Contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for
this cylinder, which differ from those of the standard
cylinder.
Note 4) It is not possible to manufacture this cylinder with an auto
switch.
Quick Reference
Guide
-XB7
C55
Ordeer
Mad
Specifications
C85 (8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25); C76 (32, 40)
Bottom mount
Front mount
Dimensions,
Details on
chapter C85, 76
refer to
Details on
chapter CW
Details on
chapter CR
Additional
Details on
specifications,
chapter C85, 76
refer to
Details on
chapter CW
Details on
chapter CR
CP95
Mounting
C76
40C to +70C
Packing, Bumper - Low nitrile rubber
Wearing-Resin
Grease
Auto switch
C85
Double acting single rod Double acting double rod Double acting single rod
Ambient temp.
Material
CR
C95
C85W, C76W
-X
(Made to Order)
Action
C85, C76
D(Auto Switch)
Series
Direct
mount
Air cylinder/Standard
Model Selection
Procedures
Applicable
cylinder
7-5
Symbol
-XB9
C85
C76
Mounting
Bore size
Stroke
XB9
Specifications
Applicable cylinder
Air cylinder/Standard
Series
C85, C76
Action
Bore size
Piston speed
Cushion
Auto switch
Mounting
10 to 50mm/s
Rubber bumper
Available for mounting
Basic, Foot
Flange
Trunnion
Clevis
Dimensions,
refer to
Details on
chapter C85, C76
Additional specifications,
refer to
Details on
chapter C85, C76
Warning
Precaution
Be aware that smoking cigarettes, etc. after your hands have come into
contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
hazardous to humans.
7-6
Ordeer
Mad
C95
CP95 Standard model no.Details on chapter C95, CP95
Quick Reference
Guide
Ordeer
Mad
XB13
C55
Cushion
Auto switch
Mounting
Dimensions, refer to
Additional specifications,
refer to
C76
5 to 50mm/s
With
both-side
air cushion
CP95
Piston speed
32, 40
50, 63
80, 100
C95
Details on
chapter
C95, CP95
-X
(Made to Order)
Action
C95, CP95
Details on
chapter
C95, CP95
D(Auto Switch)
Series
Air cylinder/Standard
Model Selection
Procedures
Applicable cylinder
C85
Specifications
7-7
Symbol
-XC4
C95
CP95
XC4
Specifications
Applicable
cylinder
Air cylinder/Standard
C95, CP95
Series
C95, CP95,
C95W,
CP95W
Action
Wiper ring
SCB scraper
Cushion
Auto switch
Additional
specifications,
refer to
Air cushion
Available for mounting (Bore size 200mm or less)
Refer to
chapter C95, CP95
Cautions
Heavy duty scraper should not be changed.
Change not only the cover but also the rod cover
assembly since heavy duty scraper is pressed in.
7-8
Ordeer
Mad
C95
CP95
-XC6
Quick Reference
Guide
XC6
Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
C55
Ordeer
Mad
Specifications
Air cylinder/Standard
C85
Applicable cylinder
C95, CP95
Mounting
Add'l specifications,
refer to
(Common for each series)
C76
Air cushion
Available for mounting (Bore size 200mm or less)
CP95
Auto switch
Refer to
chapter C95, CP95
C95
Cushion
-X
(Made to Order)
Double acting
D(Auto Switch)
Action
C95, CP95
C95W, CP95W
Model Selection
Procedures
Applicable series
7-9
Symbol
Tie Rod, Cushion Valve, Tie Rod Nut, etc. Made of Stainless Steel
XC7
Specifications
Applicable cylinder
Air cylinder/Standard
Series
C95, CP95
Action
Mounting
7-10
-XC7
Ordeer
Mad
C95
CP95
Symbol
-XC10
Mounting
Bore size
Stroke A
Additional
symbol
Stroke B
Additional
symbol
XC10
Quick Reference
Guide
Ordeer
Mad
C55
C85
C76
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
7-11
Symbol
-XC11
Mounting
Style
Bore size
Stroke A
Add'l
symbol
Stroke B-A
Add'l
symbol
XC11
Precaution
1. Do not supply air until the cylinder is fixed with the attached bolt.
2. If air is supplied without securing the cylinder, the cylinder could
lurch, posing the risk of injury to personnel or damage to the
peripheral equipment.
7-12
Ordeer
Mad
Tandem Cylinder
C95
CP95
Quick Reference
Guide
11
Ordeer
Mad
XC12
Tandem cylinder
C85
C55
C76
Specifications
0.1MPa
Mounting
Additional specifications,
refer to
Air cushion
Available for mounting
C95
Auto switch
-X
(Made to Order)
Cushion
CP95
C95, CP95
Action
Details on
chapter C95, CP95
D(Auto Switch)
Series
Air cylinder/Standard
Model Selection
Procedures
Applicable cylinder
7-13
Symbol
-XC14
XC14 A
A
B
Specifications
Applicable cylinder
Series
Air cylinder/Standard
C95
Action
0.05MPa
Auto switch
Mounting
Additional
specifications,
refer to
7-14
Ordeer
Mad
C95
CP95
Symbol
-XC18
NPT Port
Quick Reference
Guide
13
Ordeer
Mad
XC18
NPT port
C55
Specifications
C95, CP95
Action
Bore size
(mm)
Cushion
Rubber bumper
C76
CP95
Details on
chapter
C95, CP95
C95
Additional
specifications,
refer to
-X
(Made to Order)
Mounting
D(Auto Switch)
Auto switch
C85
Air cylinder/Standard
Series
Model Selection
Procedures
Cylinder
7-15
Ordeer
Mad
Symbol
-XC22
C95
CP95
XC22
Specifications
Air cylinder/Standard
Applicable series
Series variation
Bore size
(mm)
Action
Ambient temperature
Cushion
Auto switch
Mounting
Additional
specifications,
refer to
7-16
C95, CP95
C95, CP95 (Standard)
C95W, CP95W (Double rod)
32, 40, 50, 63, 80,
100
Double acting
(1) Without auto switch: -10C to +70C (No condensation)
With auto switch : -10C to +60C
Air cushion
Available for mounting
Details on chapter
C95, CP95
C95
CP95
Quick Reference
Guide
15
Ordeer
Mad
XC35
C55
Specifications
1.0MPa
0.05MPa
C76
Auto switch
Mounting
CP95
Scraper
C95
Cushion
C85
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
Action
C95, CP95
Model Selection
Procedures
Applicable series
7-17
7-18
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Reed Switch
Solid State Switch
P 8-7
C85
Reed Switch
CP95
C76
P 8-21
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
Model Selection
Procedures
8-1
Style
Mounting
method
Electrical entry
Page
8-8
8-9
8-10
Reed switch
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-30
8-31
Band mounting
8-2
Rail mounting
Tie-rod mounting
Direct mounting
Style
Mounting
method
Electrical entry
Page
Reed
switch
8-19
8-32
8-33
8-34
Quick Reference
Guide
8-20
8-35
8-36
C55
The suitable operating point can be indicated with green light. (RedGreenRed)
Grommet
Rail
Grommet
Tie-rod
Grommet
8-38
C85
8-37
Band
8-39
8-40
8-49
8-41
C76
Solid state
switch
8-42
8-43
8-44
8-47
CP95
Water resistant
2 colour indication
Grommet
D-F7NTL
8-45
Tie-rod
Grommet
D-F5NTL
8-46
Rail
Grommet
D-P5DWL
8-48
D-PC
8-50
D(Auto Switch)
Solid state
switch
Strong magnetic
field resistant
2 colour indication
Band
With connector
Model Selection
Procedures
Solid state
switch
With
prewiered
connectoer
C95
Rail
-X
(Made to Order)
Solid state
switch
With timer
Direct
With timer
8-3
Prior to Use
Auto Switch Specifications
Precautions
Auto Switch Common Specifications
Auto switch style
Reed switch
Current leakage
None
Operating time
1.2ms
Shock resistance
300m/s
1000m/s
Insulation resistance
1000V AC/min.
(between lead wire and the case)
1500V AC/min.
(between lead wire and the case) (1)
Withstand voltage
Ambient temperature
10 to 60C
Protective construction
Note 1) Connector style (D-A73C/A80C/C73C/C80C) and D-9/9A/A9/A9V style: 1000V AC/min. (between lead wire and the case)
Note 2) IEC529 Standard IP63, Rainproof construction (JISC0920) for Terminal conduit style (D-A3/A3A/A3C/G39/G39A/G39C/K39/K39A/K39C) and DIN teminal
style (D-A44/A44A/A44C).
Note 3) Except solid state switch with timer (D-M5TL, G5NTL, F7NTL, F5NTL) and Auto switch for strong magnetic field resistance (D-P5DWL).
D-J51: 5ms or less
How to Order
Ex.)
D-A73 L
0.5m
3m
5m
None
8-4
Part No.
D-LC05
0.5m
D-LC30
3m
D-LC50
5m
Old
New
Output (+)
Red
Brown
Output ()
Black
Blue
Old
New
Red
Brown
Power supply
Old
New
Red
Brown
GND
Black
Blue
Output
White
Black
Old
New
Red
Brown
GND
Black
Blue
GND
Black
Blue
Output
White
Black
Output
White
Black
Diagnositc
Yellow
output
Orange
Latching
style
Yellow
diagnostic
outout
Orange
Prior to Use
Auto Switch Hysteresis/Contact Protection Box
Contact Protection Box/CD-P11, CD-P12
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
CD-P11
CD-P12
C85
C76
The following auto switches are not incorporated with the contact protection box.
CD-P12
Load voltage
100V AC max.
200V AC
24V DC
25mA
12.5mA
50mA
CP95
Part No.
The distance between the turn-on point (ON) of the switch by moving of the piston to the turn-off point (OFF) is called "Hysteresis".
This hysteresis is included as part of the operating range (one
side).
Model Selection
Procedures
Switch turn-on
point (ON)
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
Switch turn-off
point (OFF)
8-5
Prior to Use
Auto Switch Connection Method/Connection Example
Basic Wiring
3 wire PNP
Brown
Switch
main
ciruit
Switch
main
ciruit
Black
Load
Blue
Reed switch
2 wire
Brown
Load
Brown
Load
Black
Switch
main
circuit
2 wire
Indicator
protective
circuit
Blue
Brown
Load
Blue
Blue
Brown
Brown
Load
Black
Switch
main
circuit
Indicator
protective
circuit
Brown
Switch
main
ciruit
Load
Load
Blue
Blue
Blue
Sink input
3 wire NPN
Black
Switch
Source input
3 wire PNP
Black
IN
IN
Brown
Brown
Switch
Blue
Blue
COM
COM
PLC internal circuit
2 wire
2 wire
Brown
IN
Switch
Blue
IN
Brown
COM
Switch
Blue
COM
PLC internal circuit
3 wire
NPN/AND connection (with relay)
Switch 1
Switch 2
Brown
Black
Relay
Blue
Brown
Black
Relay
Blue
Switch 1
Switch 2
Brown
Black
Load
Blue
Brown
Black
Blue
NPN/OR connection
Switch 1
Switch 2
Brown
Black
Blue
Load
Brown
Black
Blue
2 wire (2 pcs.)
AND connection
Brown
Switch 1
Switch 2
Blue
Brown
OR connection
Load
Blue
8-6
Brown
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Reed Switch
8-7
D-C73/D-C76/D-C80
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-C76
Relay/PLC
IC circuit
24V DC
100V AC
4 to 8V DC
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
20mA
None
0.8V
Indicator light
Relay/PLC/IC circuit
Application
Load voltage
Max. load current
Contact protection circuit
Internal resistance
24V
AC
DC
or less
50mA
AC
48V DC
AC
100V DC
40mA
20mA
None
1 or less (Including 3m lead wire)
Lead wire - Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-C73
Reed switch
LED Brown(Red)
Resistance
Contact
protective
box
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
CD-P11
Zener diode
CD-P12
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Blue(Black)
D-C76
DC(+)Brown(Red)
OUT Black
Load
Reverse flow
prevent diode
DC()Blue
(+)
Power voltage
Reed switch
LED
Resistance
()
Contact
protective
box
OUT()
Brown(Red)
CD-P11
CD-P12
Reed switch
D-C80
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
8-8
D-C73C/D-C80C
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
D-C73C
Relay/PLC
24V DC
5 to 40mA
None
2.4V
ON: When red light emitting diode
C85
Indicator light
C55
Specifications
D-C73C (With indicator light)
D-C80C
Relay/PLC
AC
24V DC
50mA
C76
None
1 (Including 3m lead wire)
CP95
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p. 8-4
Note 2) Refer to p. 8-4 for lead wire length.
Note 3) Lead wire with connector may be shipped with switch.
Caution
Precautions
Dimensions
C95
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-C73C
-X
(Made to Order)
Blue(Black)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
D(Auto Switch)
Reed switch
LED
D-C80C
Contact
protective
box
OUT()
Brown(Red)
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
Model Selection
Procedures
to
Reed switch
Quick Reference
Guide
Connector
8-9
D-A33/D-A34/D-A44
Applicable Actuator Series
Series
C95
Specifications
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
D-A3 (With indicator light) Terminal conduit
Auto switch model number
Application
Load voltage
Load current range
Contact protection circuit
D-A33
D-A34
PLC
Relay/PLC
24V DC
24V DC
100V AC
200V AC
5 to 50mA
5 to 50mA
5 to 25mA
5 to12.5mA
None
Built-in
2.4V
Caution
Precautions
D-A33
LED
Resistance
OUT(+)
1st
terminal
Zener diode
D-A34, D-A44
Choke coil
Reed switch
OUT() to
2nd
terminal
LED
Resistance
Zener diode
Surge absorber
8-10
100V AC
200V AC
5 to 25mA
5 to 12.5mA
OUT(+) to
1st
terminal
Built-in
2.4V
ON: When red light emitting diode
Dimensions
D-A3
Internal Circuit
Reed switch
24V DC
5 to 50mA
OUT()
2nd
terminal
Relay/PLC
D-A44
D-A33A/D-A34A/D-A44A
Bore size (mm)
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100,
125, 160, 200, 250
C95
Specifications
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
D-A3A (With indicator light) Terminal conduit
D-A34A
D-A33A
Relay/PLC
100V AC
200V AC
24V DC
5 to 50mA
5 to 25mA
5 to12.5mA
5 to 50mA
Built-in
None
2.4V
D-A44A
Load voltage
OUT(+) to
1st
terminal
Resistance
Zener diode
Surge absorber
24V DC
100V AC
200V AC
5 to 50mA
5 to 25mA
5 to12.5mA
D-A33A
Built-in
2.4V
ON: When red light emitting diode
Dimensions
D-A3A
Caution
Precautions
qUse cable whose O. D. is within the
size in the figure to maintain water
resistant performance.
C95
Zener diode
OUT(+)
1st
terminal
D-A44A
-X
(Made to Order)
Resistance
D(Auto Switch)
Reed switch
Model Selection
Procedures
OUT()
2nd
terminal
C76
Relay/PLC
Application
Choke coil
CP95
D-A34A, D-A44A
Reed switch
Internal Circuit
OUT() to
2nd
terminal
PLC
24V DC
C85
Load voltage
C55
Series
Quick Reference
Guide
8-11
D-A72/D-A73/D-A80
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Electrical entry : Perpendicular
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-A7 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Application
D-A72
D-A73
Relay/PLC
Relay/PLC
Load voltage
200V AC
24V DC
100V AC
5 to 10mA
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
None
2.4V
Relay/IC circuit/PLC
Application
Load voltage
Max. load current
Contact protection circuit
Internal resistance
AC
24V DC
or less
50mA
48V AC
DC
100V AC
DC
40mA
20mA
None
1 or less (Including 3m lead wire)
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on the p. 8-4.
Note 2) Refer to the p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-A72
Reed switch
LED
Brown(Red)
OUT
Brown(Red)
Choke
coil
Resistance
Zener diode
Surge
absorber
to
OUT
Blue(Black)
Blue(Black)
D-A73
Reed switch
LED Brown(Red)
Resistance
Contact
protection
box
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Zener diode
to
CD-P11
OUT()
Blue(Black)
CD-P12
Blue(Black)
Contact
protection
box
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT()
Brown(Red)
to
Reed switch
D-A80
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
8-12
D-A7 H/D-A80H
Applicable Actuator Series
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-A7H (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Application
D-A72H
D-A73H
D-A76H
Relay/PLC
Relay/PLC
IC circuit
Load voltage
200V AC
24V DC
100V AC
4 to 8V DC
5 to 10mA
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
20mA
None
2.4V
0.8V or less
Relay/IC circuit/PLC
D-A72H
Contact protection box
CD-P11
Reed switch
LED
Brown(Red)
100V AC
DC
40mA
20mA
None
1 or less (Including 3m lead wire)
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
OUT
Brown(Red)
Choke
coil
Resistane
Internal resistance
50mA
48V AC
DC
CP95
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
AC
24V DC
or less
C76
Applications
Load voltage
Zener diode
to
Surge
absorber
OUT
Blue(Black)
C95
Blue(Black)
D-A73H
Resistance
Contact
protection
box
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Zener diode
-X
(Made to Order)
Reed switch
LED Brown(Red)
to
CD-P11
OUT()
Blue(Black)
CD-P12
Blue(Black)
D-A76H
DC()
Blue(Black)
D(Auto Switch)
Load
Reverse flow OUT
Black(White)
prevent diode
(+)
()
Model Selection
Procedures
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Resistance
Power voltage
(DC)
Reed switch
LED
D-A80H
Contact
protection
box
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT()
Brown(Red)
to
Reed switch
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
Series
CD85
C85
Grommet
Electrical entry : In-line
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
8-13
D-A73C/D-A80C
Applicable Actuator Series
Connector
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-A73C (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Application
Load voltage
Load current range
Contact protection circuit
Internal voltage drop
Indicator light
D-A73C
Relay/PLC
24V DC
5 to 40mA
None
2.4V
ON: When red light emitting diode
D-A80C
Relay/IC circuit/PLC
AC
Load voltage
24V DC
50mA
None
1 or less (Including 3m lead wire)
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Note 3) Lead wire with connector may be shipped with switch.
Caution
Dimensions
Precautions
qConfirm that the connector is appropriately
tightened. If tightened insufficiently, the
water resistant performance will deteriorate.
wRefer to p.8-52 for the details.
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Reed switch
D-A73C
Blue(Black)
Contact
protection
box
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT()
Brown(Red)
to
Reed switch
D-A80C
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
8-14
D-A5 /D-A6
C95
Specifications
D-A5 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Application
Load voltage
D-A53
D-A54
D-A56
PLC
Relay/PLC
IC circuit
24V DC
24V DC
100V AC
200V AC
4 to 8V DC
5 to 50mA
5 to 50mA
5 to 25mA
5 to 12.5mA
20mA
None
Built-in
None
2.4V
Indicator light
0.8V or less
C85
and range
24V
AC
DC
50mA
D-A64
D-A67
Relay/PLC
PLC/IC circuit
100V AC
200V AC
MAX. 24V DC
25mA
12.5mA
30mA
Built-in
None
Internal resistance
10
1 (Including
3m lead wire)
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m or 4, 0.2mm2,
3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
CP95
Lead wire
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
C55
Series
C76
Grommet
Quick Reference
Guide
Dimensions
D-A53
Reed switch LED
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Resistance
C95
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Zener diode
D-A54
-X
(Made to Order)
Zener diode
Choke coil
LED
OUT()
to Blue(Black)
OUT(+) to
Brown(Red)
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
(+)
Load
Reverse flow OUT
Black(White)
prevent diode
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-A64
Model Selection
Procedures
Resistance
Power voltage
Reed switch
LED
D(Auto Switch)
D-A56
()
Choke coil
OUT( ) to
Blue(Black)
Reed switch
OUT() to
Brown(Red)
Surge absorber
D-A67
Reed switch
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
OUT()
Brown(Red)
8-15
D-A90/D-A93/D-A96
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Electrical entry: In-line
Series
C55
20, 25
Specifications
D-A90 (Without indicator light)
D-A90
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Reed switch
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT()
Brown(Red)
Reed switch
LED
or less
48V
50mA
AC
DC
or less
40mA
None
Internal resistance
Brown(Red)
Resistance
Contact
protective
box
Zener diode
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
to
OUT()
Blue(Black)
D-A96
100V
AC
DC
or less
20mA
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Resistance
Reverse flow
prevent diode
Load
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-A96
Relay/PLC
IC circuit
24V DC
100V AC
4 to 8V DC
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
20mA
None
2.4V (up to 20mA)/ 3V (up to 40mA)
0.8V
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 2.7, 0.18mm2 X 2cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
D-A90/D-A93
D-A96
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 2.7, 0.15mm2 X 3cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
(+)
Power voltage
LED
Load voltage
CD-P11
CD-P12
D-A93
Blue(Black)
Reed switch
AC
DC
Application
to
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
D-A93
()
Caution
Precautions
qFix the switch with appropriate screw installed on the switch body. If using other
screws, switch may be damaged.
Dimensions
( ): D-A93
8-16
24V
D-A90
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
D-A90V/D-A93V/D-A96V
Series
C55
20, 25
Specifications
D-A90V (Without indicator light)
D-A90V
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
Contact
protection
box
Zener diode
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
to
CD-P12
Blue(Black)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
D-A96V
Reverse flow
prevent diode
Load
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
Load voltag
C85
IC circuit
24V DC
100V AC
4 to 8V DC
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
20mA
D-A96V
Relay/PLC
None
2.7V or less
0.8V or less
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 2.7, 0.18mm2 X 2cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
D-A90V/D-A93V
D-A96V
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 2.7, 0.15mm2 X 3cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
(+)
()
Dimensions
D-A93V
C95
Resistance
or less
20mA
Power voltage
Reed switch
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
AC
DC
CD-P11
LED
None
1 or less (Including 3m lead wire)
100V
Caution
Precautions
qFix the switch with appropriate screw installed on the switch body. If using other
screws, switch may be damaged.
D(Auto Switch)
Reed switch
Resistance
40mA
Internal resistance
or less
Application
D-A93V
LED
50mA
AC
DC
C76
to
48V
CP95
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT()
Brown(Red)
or less
Model Selection
Procedures
Reed switch
Contact
protection
box
D-A90V
AC
DC
-X
(Made to Order)
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
24V
C55
Grommet
Electrical entry: Perpendicular
Quick Reference
Guide
8-17
D-Z73/D-Z76/D-Z80
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Series
CP95
Specifications
D-Z7 (With indicator light)
D-Z73
D-Z76
Relay/PLC
IC circuit
24V DC
100V AC
4 to 8V DC
5 to 40mA
5 to 20mA
20mA
None
2.4V (up to 20mA)/ 3V (up to 30mA)
Indicator light
0.8V
Relay/PLC/IC circuit
Application
Load voltage
Max. load current
24V AC
DC or less
48V AC
DC or less
100V AC
DC or less
40mA
20mA
50mA
None
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Lead wire Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
D-Z73
Reed switch
LED Brown(Red)
Resistance
Dimensions
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Contact
protection
box
Zener diode
to
CD-P11
OUT()
Blue(Black)
CD-P12
Blue(Black)
D-Z76
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Resistance
Load
Reverse flow OUT
Black(White)
prevent diode
DC()
Blue(Black)
(+)
Power voltage
Reed switch
LED
()
Contact
protection
box
CD-P11
CD-P12
OUT()
Brown(Red)
to
OUT( )
Blue(Black)
Reed switch
D-Z80
8-18
D-Z73
D-Z76, Z80
D-A79W
Applicable Actuator Series
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-A79W (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Application
Load voltage
Load current range
D-A79W
Relay/PLC
24V DC
5 to 40mA
None
4V
Indicator light
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
Series
CD85
C85
Grommet
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
(Red Green Red)
C76
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on the p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to the p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
CP95
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-A79W
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Switch
main
circuit
Reverse flow
prevent diode
C95
Reed switch
LED
-X
(Made to Order)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Indicator light/Operation
8-19
D-A59W
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
(Red Green Red)
Series
C95
Specifications
D-A59W (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Application
Load voltage
Load current range
Contact protection circuit
Internal voltage drop
Indicator light
D-A59W
Relay/PLC
24V DC
5 to 40mA
Built-in
4V
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-A59W
Choke coil
Reed switch
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Zener diode
Switch
main
circuit
LED
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
8-20
Dimensions
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
8-21
D-H7A1/D-H7A2/D-H7B
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-H7 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
D-H7A1
D-H7A2
Wiring
Output
Application
Power voltage
Current consumption
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
10mA or less
28V DC or less
40mA or less
1.5V
0.8V at 10mA
of load current
Indicator light
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load current
Current leakage
2 wire
NPN
Load voltage
D-H7B
3 wire
5 to 40mA
0.8V or less
4V or less
100A at 24V DC
0.8mA at 24V DC
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-H7A1
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-H7A2
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-H7B
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
DC()
Blue(Black)
8-22
D-H7C
Applicable Actuator Series
Bore size (mm)
8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25,
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-H7C (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Wiring
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
CD85
C55
Connector
D-H7C
2 wire
Output
Application
24V DC Relay/PLC
Caution
C85
Power voltage
Current consumption
Precautions
Load voltage
Load current
5 to 40mA
Current leakage
Indicator light
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
ON: When red light emitting diode
C76
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
CP95
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-H7C
-X
(Made to Order)
Switch main
circuit
C95
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
8-23
D-G39/D-K39
Applicable Actuator Series
Terminal conduit
Series
C95
Specifications
D-G39/D-K39 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Wiring
Output
Application
Power voltage
NPN
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
1st terminal
OUT
2nd terminal
DC()
3rd terminal
D-K39
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
1st terminal
OUT()
2nd terminal
8-24
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load current
40mA
5 to 40mA
1.5V
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
4V
Current leakage
D-G39
2 wire
28V DC
Internal Circuit
D-K39
3 wire
Load voltage
Caution
qUse cable whose O. D. is within the size in
the figure to maintain water resistant performance.
wAfter wiring, confirm that tightening gland
and all screws are tightened.
D-G39
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Current consumption
Precautions
Indicator light
Note) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Dimensions
D-G39A/D-K39A
Series
C95
32, 40, 50, 63. 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250
Specifications
D-G39A/D-K39A
D-G39A
D-K39A
Wiring
3 wire
2 wire
Output
NPN
Application
Power voltage
Precautions
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
10mA
Current consumption
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load voltage
28V DC
Load current
40mA
5 to 40mA
1.5V or less
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
4V or less
C85
Caution
C55
C76
Internal Circuit
D-G39A
Dimensions
CP95
DC(+)
1st terminal
Switch main
circuit
Quick Reference
Guide
Terminal conduit
OUT
2nd terminal
C95
DC()
3rd terminal
D-K39A
Switch main
circuit
-X
(Made to Order)
OUT(+)
1st terminal
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
OUT()
2nd terminal
8-25
D-F79/D-F7P/D-J79
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-F7/D-J79 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
D-F79
Application
Power voltage
D-F7P
D-J79
3 wire
Wiring
Output
NPN
2 wire
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
24V DC Relay/PLC
Current consumption
Load voltage
28V DC
Load current
40mA
80mA or less
5 to 40mA
1.5V or less
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
0.8V or less
4V or less
100A at 24V DC
0.8mA at 24V DC
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-F79
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-F7P
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-J79
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
8-26
D-F7NV/D-F7PV/D-F7BV
Applicable Actuator Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-F7V (With indicator light)
D-F7NV
Application
Power voltage
NPN
Load current
Internal voltage drop
Current leakage
Indicator light
D-F7BV
2 wire
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
24V DC Relay/PLC
Current consumption
Load voltage
D-F7PV
3 wire
Wiring
Output
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
Series
28V DC
40mA
1.5V or less
0.8V or less
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
100A at 24V DC
5 to 40mA
4V or less
0.8mA at 24V DC
C76
Grommet
Electrical entry: Perpendicular
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
CP95
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
D-F7NV
C95
OUT
Black(White)
-X
(Made to Order)
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D(Auto Switch)
D-F7PV
Model Selection
Procedures
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
D-F7BV
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
8-27
D-J79C
Applicable Actuator Series
Connector
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-J79C
Auto switch model number
Wiring
D-J79C
2 wire
Output
Application
24V DC Relay/PLC
Power voltage
Current consumption
Caution
Load voltage
Load current
5 to 40mA
Precautions
Current leakage
Indicator light
D-J79C
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
8-28
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
D-F5 /D-J5
C95
Specifications
D-F5/D-J5
Output
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Application
Power voltage
Load voltage
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Load current
Internal voltage drop
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
Current leakage
Indicator light
D-J59
D-J51
2 wire
NPN
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
24V DC Relay/PLC
AC Relay/PLC
80 to 260V AC
Current consumption
D-F59
D-F5P
3 wire
C55
D-F59
Wiring
28V DC
40mA
80mA
5 to 40mA
5 to 80mA
1.5V or less
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
0.8V or less
4V or less
14V or less
100A at 24V DC
0.8mA at 24V DC
1mA at 100 V DC
1.5mA at 200V DC
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on the p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to the p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
D-J51 differs in the shape, most sensitive position and operation range from other switches.
Contact SMC for the details.
OUT
Black(White)
C95
Switch main
circuit
CP95
D-F5P
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
DC()
Blue(Black)
-X
(Made to Order)
D-J59
D(Auto Switch)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Model Selection
Procedures
D-J51
Switch main
circuit
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
C76
Grommet
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
8-29
Switch model
NPN
Output type
Current consumption
10 mA or less
28 VDC or less
40 mA or less
Load current
Leakage current
D-M9V
2-wire
PNP
2.5 to 40 mA
0.8 V or less
4 V or less
0.8 mA or less
D-M9
D-M9B
Applicable load
Load voltage
D-M9
D-M9P
3-wire
Wiring type
Indicator light
Lead wire Oil proof heavy duty vinyl cord: 2.7 3.2 ellipse
D-M9B
0.15 mm2 2 cores
D-M9N, D-M9P
0.15 mm2 3 cores
Note 1) Refer to page 8-4 for solid state auto switch common specifications and lead wire length.
Weight
Caution
Operating Precautions
When the cable sheath is stripped, confirm
the stripping direction.
The insulator may be split or damaged
depending on the direction.
Unit: g
D-M9N(V)
D-M9P(V)
41
41
38
0.5
D-M9B(V)
Dimensions
D-M9
Mounting screw M2.5 x 4 L
Slotted set screw
D-M9B, N, P
Indicator light
2.6
2.8
D-M9N, D-M9NV
2.7
3.2
Switch
main circuit
DC (+)
Brown
DC ()
Blue
22
D-M9P, D-M9PV
D-M9V
DC ()
Blue
8
3.2
2.8
OUT ()
Blue
8-30
2
4
Switch
main circuit
OUT (+)
Brown
Indicator light
4.6
D-M9B, D-M9BV
500(3000)(5000)
2.6
OUT
Black
9.5
Switch
main circuit
DC (+)
Brown
2.7
A
B
Series
C95
CP95
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 , 125, 160, 200, 250
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
Specifications
Quick Reference
Guide
Grommet
In-line
D-Y7P
D-Y7PV
D-Y59B
D-Y69B
Perpendicular
In-line
Perpendicular
In-line
Perpendicular
Application
Power voltage
PNP
NPN
Current consumption
Load voltage
28V DC
Load current
40mA
80mA or less
5 to 40mA
1.5V or less
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
0.8V or less
4V or less
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-Y59A, D-Y69A
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.15mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
D-Y59A, D-Y7P,
D-Y59B
D-Y69A, D-Y7PV,
D-Y69B
C95
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Switch main
circuit
24V DC Relay/PLC
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
C85
Output
2 wire
3 wire
Wiring
OUT
Black(White)
-X
(Made to Order)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-Y7P(V)
D(Auto Switch)
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Switch main
circuit
C76
Electrical entry
D-Y69A
CP95
C55
OUT
Black(White)
Model Selection
Procedures
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-Y59B, D-Y69B
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
8-31
D-H7NW/D-H7PW/D-H7BW
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
(Red Green Red)
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-H7W(With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
D-H7NW
Wiring
Output
Application
Power voltage
NPN
Switch main
circuit
D-H7PW
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-H7BW
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
8-32
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load current
40mA
80mA
5 to 40mA
1.5V or less
0.8V or less at 10mA
of load current
0.8V or less
4V or less
Indicator light
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
DC()
Blue(Black)
2 wire
28V DC
Current leakage
OUT
Black(White)
D-H7BW
Load voltage
D-H7NW
D-H7PW
3 wire
Current consumption
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Dimensions
D-F79W/D-F7PW/D-J79W
Applicable Actuator Series
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
Quick Reference
Guide
Grommet
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
Green
Red)
(Red
D-F7W/D-J79W
Application
Power voltage
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
10mA
28V DC
Load current
40mA
D-F79W
Indicator light
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load voltage
Current leakage
2 wire
NPN
Current consumption
D-J79W
1.5V
( 0.8V at 10mA load current)
5 to 40mA
4V
0.8V
100A at 24V DC
C85
Output
D-F7PW
3 wire
C55
D-F79W
Wiring
0.8mA at 24V DC
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
C76
OUT
Black(White)
CP95
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Dimensions
C95
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-F7PW
-X
(Made to Order)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
D(Auto Switch)
D-J79W
OUT
Black(White)
Model Selection
Procedures
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
DC()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
8-33
D-F7NWV/D-F7BWV
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Electrical entry: Perpendicular
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
Green
Red)
(Red
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-F7BWV
Wiring
3 wire
2 wire
Output
NPN
Application
Power voltage
Current consumption
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load voltage
28V DC
Load current
40mA
5 to 40mA
1.5V
( 0.8V at 10mA load current)
4V
0.8mA or less at 24V DC
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-F7NWV
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-F7BWV
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
8-34
D-F59W/D-F5PW/D-J59W
Series
C95
Specifications
D-F5W/D-J59W (With indicator light)
Application
Power voltage
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
D-F59W
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load current
40mA
Indicator light
C55
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Load voltage
Current leakage
2 wire
NPN
Current consumption
D-J59W
3 wire
1.5V
( 0.8V at 10mA load current)
5 to 40mA
0.8V
100A at 24V DC
C85
Output
D-F5PW
D-F59W
Wiring
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
C76
Quick Reference
Guide
Grommet
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
Green
Red)
(Red
CP95
OUT
Black(White)
Dimensions
DC()
Blue(Black)
C95
D-F5PW
-X
(Made to Order)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
D-J59W
Switch main
circuit
D(Auto Switch)
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
Model Selection
Procedures
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
8-35
D-Y7NW(V)/D-Y7PW(V)/D-Y7BW(V)
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
The suitable operating point can
be indicated with a green light.
Green
Red)
(Red
Series
CP95
Specifications
D-Y7W/D-Y7WV (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-Y7NW D-Y7NWV D-Y7PW
Electrical entry
In-line
Perpendicular
Application
Power voltage
10mA or less
28V DC or less
Load current
40mA or less
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
D-Y7PW(V)
Switch main
circuit
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT
Black(White)
DC()
Blue(Black)
D-Y7BW(V)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
8-36
5 to 40mA
0.8V
4V
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.15mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
D-Y7W
DC()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
Indicator light
24V DC Relay/PLC
1.5V
Internal voltage drop
( 0.8V at 10mA load current)
D-Y7NW(V)
Perpendicular
PNP
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Load voltage
Current leakage
In-line
2 wire
NPN
Current consumption
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
3 wire
Wiring
Output
In-line
D-Y7WV
2 Colour Indication Style with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch/Band Mounting
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-H7LF (With indicator light)
D-H7LF
NPN
Output
Latching operation
Diagnostic output
24V DC Relay/PLC
Application
Power voltage
Load voltage
26V DC
Load current
40mA
0.8V
CP95
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
Dimensions
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 4 cores (Brown, Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
D(Auto Switch)
Switch main
circuit
DC()
Blue(Black)
C76
100A at 24V DC
Current leakage
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT(Normal output)
Black(White)
OUT
(Diagnostic output)
Orange(Blue)
C85
20mA
Current consumption
Indicator light
C55
4 wire
Wiring
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
Model Selection
Procedures
Grommet
The output signal can be
detected in an unsteady
detecting area.
8-37
2 Colour Indication Style with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch/Band Mounting
D-H7NF
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
4 wire
Wiring
NPN
Output
Normal operation
Diagnostic output
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Application
Power voltage
10mA
Current consumption
28V DC
Load voltage
40mA
Load current
100A at 24V DC
Current leakage
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(Normal output)
Black(White)
OUT
(Diagnostic output)
Orange(Yellow)
DC()
Blue(Black)
Dimensions
8-38
Indicator light
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 4 cores (Brown, Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
2 Colour Indication Style with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch/Rail Mounting
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-F7LF (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
4 wire
Output
NPN
Diagnostic output
Latching operation
Application
24V DC Relay/PLC
Power voltage
C85
Current consumption
Load voltage
26V DC
Load current
40mA
0.8V
100A at 24V DC
Current leakage
Indicator light
C55
D-F7LF
Wiring
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
DC()
Blue(Black)
C95
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT(Normal output)
Black(White)
OUT
(Diagnostic output)
Orange(Blue)
-X
(Made to Order)
Switch main
circuit
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 4 cores (Brown,Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
C76
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
CD85
CP95
Grommet
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Dimensions
8-39
2 Colour Indication Style with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch/Rail Mounting
D-F79F
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
The output signal can be
detected in an unsteady
detecting area.
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-F79F (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
D-F79F
Wiring
4 wire
Output
NPN
Diagnostic output
Normal operation
Application
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Power voltage
Current consumption
28V DC
Load voltage
40mA
Load current
100 A at 24V DC
Current leakage
Indicator light
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(Normal output)
Black(White)
OUT
(Diagnostic output)
Orange(Yellow)
DC()
Blue(Black)
Dimensions
8-40
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 4 cores (Brown, Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
2 Colour Indication Style with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch/Tie-rod Mounting
D-F59F
Series
C95
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250
Specifications
D-F59F
D-F59F
NPN
Output
Normal operation
Diagnostic output
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Application
Power voltage
28V DC
Load voltage
40mA
Load current
100A at 24V DC
Current leakage
DC()
Blue(Black)
C76
CP95
OUT
(Diagnostic output)
Orange(Yellow)
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.2mm2, 4 cores (Brown, Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
C95
Switch main
circuit
OUT(Normal output)
Black(White)
-X
(Made to Order)
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
C85
10mA
Current consumption
Indicator light
C55
4 wire
Wiring
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Quick Reference
Guide
Grommet
The output signal can be
detected in an unsteady
detecting area.
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Dimensions
8-41
D-H7BAL
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Water (coolant) resistant
performance
Series
CD85
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-H7BAL (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Wiring
Application
Precautions
2 wire
24V DC Relay/PLC
Power voltage
Current consumption
Load voltage
Load current
5 to 40mA
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Switch main
circuit
OUT()
Blue(Black)
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 3m (Standard)
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Dimensions
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
8-42
D-H7BAL
Output
Caution
Indicator light/Operation
D-F7BAL
Applicable Actuator Series
Bore size (mm)
8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25,
CD76
32, 40
Specifications
D-F7BAL (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Wiring
D-F7BAL
Quick Reference
Guide
Series
CD85
C55
Grommet
Water (coolant) resistant performance
2 wire
Output
Application
24V DC Relay/PLC
Power voltage
Load voltage
Load current
5 to 40mA
C85
Current consumption
Precautions
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 3m (Standard)
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
CP95
Dimensions
C76
Caution
C95
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
-X
(Made to Order)
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
Indicator light/Operation
8-43
D-F5BAL
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Water (coolant) resistant performance
Series
C95
Specifications
D-F5BAL (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Wiring
D-F5BAL
2 wire
Output
Application
Caution
24V DC Relay/PLC
Power voltage
Precautions
Current consumption
Load voltage
Load current
5 to 40mA
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 3m (Standard)
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Indicator light/Operation
8-44
Dimensions
D-F7NTL
Applicable Actuator Series
Series
Output
Output operation
Switch main
circuit
OUT
Black(White)
NPN
Off-delay
1ms
Off-delay time
20050ms
Application
Power voltage
Load voltage
Load current
Internal voltage drop
Current leakage
Indicator light
DC()
Blue(Black)
3 wire
Operation time
Current consumption
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
D-F7NTL
Quick Reference
Guide
Wiring
C55
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
5/12/24V DC (4.5 to 28V DC)
10mA
C85
Specifications
D-F7NTL (With indicator light)
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
C85
28V DC
80mA
1.5V (0.8V at 10mA)
100 A at 24V DC
ON: When red light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.2mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 3m (Standard)
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
C76
Grommet
With built-in OFF-delay timer
(200ms)
CP95
Timer Operation
C95
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
Dimensions
8-45
D-F5NTL
Applicable Actuator Series
Series
Grommet
With built-in OFF-delay timer
(200ms)
C95
Specifications
D-F5NTL (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number
Wiring
Output
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Output operation
Switch main
circuit
Current consumption
Load current
Internal voltage drop
Indicator light
NPN
Off-delay
IC circuit/Relay/PLC
5/12/24V DC (4.5 to 28V DC)
10mA
28V DC
80mA
1.5V ( 0.8V at 10mA)
100A at 24V DC
ON: When red light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.3mm2, 3 cores (Brown, Black, Blue), 3m (Standard)
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Timer Operation
Detection of immediate positioning for high-speed cylinder
Detecting point dispersion occurs due to response time of PLC (sequencer);
e. g. scanning.
Ex.) Cylinder speed-1000 mm/sec.
Sequencer response time-0.1 sec.
Detecting point despersion-Within
100mm (=1000mm/sec. X 0.1sec.)
Take PLC response time into consideration when using.
8-46
3 wire
1ms
Current leakage
Dimensions
D-F5NTL
20050ms
Load voltage
DC()
Blue(Black)
Off-delay time
Power voltage
OUT
Black(White)
Operation time
Application
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
D-Y7BAL
Applicable Actuator Series
2 wire
24V DC Relay/PLC
24V DC (10 to 28V DC)
Load current
5 to 40mA
Current leakage
Caution
Indicator light
Quick Reference
Guide
D-Y7BAL
Load voltage
Internal voltage drop
C55
Specifications
D-Y7BAL (With indicator light)
Precautions
4V
0.8mA at 24V DC
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
C85
Series
CP95
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 3.4, 0.15mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 3m (Standard)
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
C76
Grommet
Improved coolant-resistant
performance
Dimensions
CP95
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Switch main
circuit
OUT(+)
Brown(Red)
C95
OUT()
Blue(Black)
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
Indicator light/Operation
8-47
Strong Magnetic Field Resistant 2 Colours lndication Style Solid State Switch/Rail Mounting
D-P5DWL
Applicable Actuator Series
Grommet
Possible to use in an environment
where disturbance magnetic field
is generated.
Series
C95
Specifications
Bore size(mm)
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100,
125, 160, 200, 250
Load current
6 to 40mA
Current leakage
Operation time
Indicator light
Precautions
Monophase current welding. Not applicable
for DC inverter welding, arc welding nor
capacitor welding.
2 wire (Non-polar)
24V DC Relay/PLC
Load voltage
Internal voltage drop
Caution
D-P5DWL
5V
1mA at 24V DC
40ms
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 6, 0.5mm2, 2 cores (Brown, Blue), 3m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4.
Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
Internal Circuit
Indicator light/Operation
8-48
OUT()
Brown
OUT( )
Blue
Switch main
circuit
Dimensions
2 Colour lndication Style with Diagnostic Output Solid State Switch/Tie-rod Mounting
D-F5LF
4 wire
NPN
Latching operation
24V DC Relay/PLC
24V DC (10 to 26V DC)
20mA
Load voltage
26V DC
Load current
40mA
0.8V
100A at 24V DC
Operating point: Red light emitting diode
Suitable operating point: Green light emitting diode
Orange colour indicator lights on when diagnostic output is ON.
CP95
Lead wire
Oilproof vinyl heavy insulation cable, 4, 0.2mm2, 4 cores (Brown, Black, Orange, Blue), 0.5m
Note 1) Refer to common specifications on p.8-4. Note 2) Refer to p.8-4 for lead wire length.
-X
(Made to Order)
Dimensions
D(Auto Switch)
DC(+)
Brown(Red)
OUT(Normal output)
Black(White)
Diagnosis OUT
(Diagnostic output)
Orange(Blue)
DC()
Blue(Black)
Model Selection
Procedures
Switch main
circuit
C95
The diagnostic signal is output when detecting position remains within unsteady area
(where indicator light is Red.) for more than 0.5 sec. This signal keeps outputting
even after normal output goes to OFF. The diagnostic output becomes OFF when
detecting position remains within the most suitable operating range (where indicator
light is Green.) for more than 0.5 sec.
Internal Circuit
( ): If not applicable for IEC Standard
Quick Reference
Guide
Specifications
D-F5LF (With indicator light)
C55
C95
Bore size(mm)
C85
Series
C76
Grommet
The output signal can be
detected in an unsteady
detecting area.
8-49
D-PC
Eliminates troublesome connections
Harnessing work is reduced by the cable with
connector specifications
How to Order
Connector specifications
D M9N S A PC
Connector type
M83 pin
M124 pin
M84 pin
Pin
arrangement
Cord length
S
M
L
Connector type
0.5m
1.0m
3.0m
M83 pin
M84 pin
M124 pin
A
B
D
Applicable
standards
Impact
resistance
Enclosure
Insulation
resistance
Withstand
voltage
Function
Rail
mount
2 color
indicator
Grommet in-line
Grommet
perpendicular
Grommet in-line
Grommet
perpendicular
F7NWV, F7BWV
With diagnostic
output
8-50
Mounting
Function
Grommet in-line
Grommet
perpendicular
Grommet
perpendicular
Grommet in-line
Grommet
perpendicular
Y7BA, F9BA
Water resistant
F7BA
With timer
F7NT
Magnetic
field resistant
P5DW
Water resistant
With timer
Water resistant
H7BA, G5BA
With timer
G5NT
G5NB
Grommet
in-line
Grommet
perpendicular
Diagnostic
output
Electrical
entry
Grommet in-line
2 color
indicator
Tie-rod
mount
F7LF, F79F
Band
mount
Electrical
entry
2 color
indicator
Diagnostic
output
F5LF, F59F
Water resistant
F5BA
With timer
F5NT
Direct
mount
Grommet in-line
2 color
indicator
Rotary
actuator
Grommet in-line
Grommet in-line
Grommet
perpendicular
M5NT, M5PT
S99V1/2, T99V1/2
Series D-PC
DC 3 wire
DC 4 wire
3 pin
4 pin
1 pin
2 pin
3 pin
4 pin
Brown
Blue
OUT (+)
OUT ()
Brown
Blue
Brown
Blue
Black
DC (+)
DC ()
OUT
DC (+)
Diagnostic
output
DC ()
OUT
Brown
Orange
Blue
Black
OUT () OUT ( )
Connector specifications
Connector type
M84 pin
M83 pin
M124 pin
Pin
arrangement
Applicable
standards
Impact
resistance
Enclosure
Insulation
resistance
Withstand
voltage
C85
M8 3 pin
Quick Reference
Guide
DC 2 wire non-polar
2 pin
C55
DC 2 wire
Sensor configuration
Dimensions
M8 4 pin
10
C76
Connector type
Sensor
M83 pin
4 pin
Sensor
M124 pin
C95
14
Number of pins
M8
M12
Manufacturer
Hirschmann
ELKA-KV 3308
BRAD HARRISON
45310
Lumberg
RKMV 3
TURCK
PKGM 3
Hirschmann
ELKA-KV 4408
BRAD HARRISON
45410
Lumberg
RKMV 4
TURCK
PKGM 4
OMRON
XS3
Hirschmann
ELKA-KV 4412
BRAD HARRISON
80456
Lumberg
RKT 4-633
TURCK
RK 4.4T
OMRON
XS2
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
44
Model Selection
Procedures
M12 4 pin
CP95
31.4
8-51
Information q
Plug-in Connector Assembly/How to Use DIN Terminal
Plug-in Connector Assembly
Connection
qLoosen the set screw and pull out the connector from the pin plug.
wBe sure to remove the set screw first and then insert a screw driver
into a recessed groove under the terminal block to separate the terminal cover from the terminal block.
eFollow the procedures and connect wires securely to specified terminals.
rIn standard cases, crimp-style terminals are used to connect wires.
Please select proper crimp-style terminals so that the wire can be
properly connected to terminal fittings.
Method of connection
AC: Connect to terminal No.1 and No.2
DC: Connect (+) to No.1 terminal and () to No.2 terminal.
With the convex port of the connector, insert the connector into the auto
switch into the sleeve. Screw the locking ring onto the switch. (Do not tighten with pliers.)
Caution
When taking in or out the connector pin to or from the pin plug, hold
the connector as perpendicular as possible.
8-52
Information w
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Band mounting
<Applicable auto switch>
Caution
qTighten the screw under the specified torque when mounting auto
switch.
wSet the mounting band perpendicularly to cylinder tube.
D-H7C
D-H7NF, D-H7LF
D-H7NW, D-H7PW, D-H7BW
Quick Reference
Guide
Mounting Bracket
Wrong mounting
Correct mounting
D-B59W
Solid state switch D-G59, D-G5P, D-K59, D-G5BAL
D-G59W, D-G5PW, D-K59W
C85
D-G59F
D-G5NTL
BA01
BA02
BA32
Cylinder
series
CDJ2
CDVJ3, 5
CDLJ2
CDM2, CDBM2
CDVM3, 5, CDLM2
CDG1, MGG
CDLG1
MGC
10
BJ2-006 BJ2
-010
15
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
BJ2
-016
BM2 BM2 BM2 BM2
-020 -025 -032 -040
BMA2 BMA2
-050 -063
BMA2 BMA2 BMA2
-020 -025 -032 BMA2 BMA2
-040 -050
BMA2
-050
8-53
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including band and screw)
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including band and screw)
Model Selection
Procedures
qPut a mounting band on the cylinder tube and set it at the auto switch mounting
position.
wPut the mounting section of the auto switch between the band mounting holes,
then adjust the position of mounting holes of switch to those of mounting band.
eLightly thread the auto switch mounting screw through the mounting hole into the
thread part of band fitting.
rAfter setting the whole body to the detecting position by sliding, tighten the
mounting screw to secure the auto switch. (The tightening torque of M4 screw
should be about 1 to 1.2Nm.)
tModification of the detection position should be made in the condition of e.
qFor series CDJ2/Put a mounting bracket on the cylinder tube. For series
CDM2/Put a mounting band on the cylinder tube and set it at the auto switch
mounting position.
wPut the mounting part of auto switch in the interval of stationary fitting to fit
the mounting hole to the hole of stationary fitting.
eScrew lightly the auto switch mounting screw through the mounting hole into
the thread part of band fitting.
rAfter setting the whole body to the detecting position by sliding, tighten the
mounting screw to secure the auto switch. (The tightening torque of M3 screw
should be about 0.8 to 1Nm.)
tModification of the detection position should be made in the condition of e.
C95
CP95
C76
Information w
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Band mounting
Mounting Bracket
D-A4 type
qTighten completely the switch mounting screw on the switch body side.
wPut a mounting band on the cylinder tube and set it at the auto switch mounting position. Put the mounting section of auto switch between the interval of mounting band,
then adjust the position of mounting holes of switch to those of mounting band.
eLightly thread the auto switch mounting screw through the mounting hole into the
thread part of band fitting.
rAfter reconfirming the detecting position, tighten the mounting screw to secure the
auto switch. (The tightening torque of M5 screw should be about 2 to 3Nm.)
tModification of the detecting position should be made in the condition of e.
qLoosen the auto switch mounting screws at both sides to pull down the hook.
wPut a mounting band on the cylinder tube and set it at the auto switch mounting position, and then hook the band.
eScrew lightly the auto switch mounting screw.
rSet the whole body to the detecting position by sliding, tighten the mounting
screw to secure the auto switch. (The tightening torque should be about 2 to
3Nm.)
tModification of the detecting position should be made in the condition of e.
20
25
32
40
8-54
CDS1
RHC
50
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including band and screw)
Cylinder series
CDM2, CDBM2
CDLM2
20
BM3 020
BM3 032
40
BM3 040
Information w
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Rail mounting
Quick Reference
Guide
Mounting Bracket
ePush the auto switch mounting screw lightly into the mounting nut through
the hole of auto switch mounting arm.
rAfter reconfirming detection position, tighten the mounting screw to secure
the auto switch. (Tightening torque of M3 screw should be 0.5 to 0.7Nm.)
tModification of the detecting position should be made in the condition of e.
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including nut, screw and spacer)
Cylinder series
CDQ2
MDU
RSDQ
MK, MK2
CE1
CXT
16
BQ-1
20
BQ-1
BQ-1
BQ-1
40
50
32
25
BQ-2
BQ-2
BQ-2
BQ-1
BMU1-025 BMU1-025 BMU1-025 BMU1-025
BQ-1
BQ-2
BQ-2
BQ-2
63
BQ-2
BMU1-025
80
BQ-2
100
BQ-2
125
BQ-2
140
BQ-2
160
BQ-2
BQ-2
8-55
Model Selection
Procedures
qSlide the auto switch mounting nut inserted into the mounting rail and set it
at the auto switch mounting position.
wFit the convex part of auto switch mounting arm into the concave part of
auto switch mounting rail. Then slide the switch over the nut.
(CDQ2 series: Fit the convex part of auto switch mounting arm through the
auto switch spacer into the concave part of auto switch mounting rail.)
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Information w
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Mounting Bracket
Tie-rod mounting
D-A59W
Solid state switch D-F59, D-F5P
D-J59, D-J51, D-F5BAL
D-F59W, D-F5PW, D-J59W
D-F59F, D-F5LF
D-F5NTL
qFix the auto switch on the auto switch mounting bracket with the mounting
screw (M4) and install the set screw.
wFit the mounting bracket into the cylinder tie-rod and then fix the auto switch
at the detecting position with the hexagonal wrench. (Be sure to put the auto
switch on the surface of cylinder tube.)
eWhen changing the detecting position, loosen the set screw to move the
auto switch and then re-fix the auto switch on the cylinder tube. (Tightening
torque of M4 screw should be 1 to 1.2 Nm.)
32
40
50
63
BT
-04
BT
-04
BT
-06
BT
-08
BT
-08
BT
-12
CDS1
MDB/MDBB
BT
-12
BT
-16
BT BT
-18A -20
8-56
qFix the mounting bracket A on the auto switch with the set screw.
wFit the convex part of mounting bracket into tie-rod and set the auto switch
at the mounting position.
eInsert the mounting bracket B from the underneath and put lightly in the tierod with the mounting screw.
rSet the whole body to the detecting position by sliding, tighten the mounting
screw to secure the auto switch. (Tightening torque of M5 screw should be 2
to 3Nm.)
tModification of the detecting position should be made in the condition of e.
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including bracket and screw)
Cylinder series
CDA1, CDBA1
CDV3, CDVS, CDL1, CE2, CNA
40
50
BA3
-040
BA3
-050
BA3
-080
BA3
-100
Information w
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Direct mounting
Quick Reference
Guide
Mounting Bracket
D-M5NW/M5PW/M5BW
D-M5NTL/M5PTL
C55
qInsert the auto switch mounting nut into the auto switch mounting
groove and then set the switch at the mounting position by sliding.
wPut the convex part of auto switch into the mounting groove and
slide it over the nut.
ePush the auto switch mounting screw lightly into the mounting nut
through the mounting hole.
rAfter reconfirming detecting position, tighten the mounting screw to
secure the auto switch. (Tightening torque of M2.5 screw should be
0.1 to 0.2Nm.)
25
32
BU-1
BU-1
F9PW(V)/F9BW(V)/F9BAL
40
BMY2-025
-X
(Made to Order)
10
BP-1
BU-1
ML1
25
BMY2-025
D-Y7NW(V)/Y7PW(V)/Y7BW(V)
D-Y7BAL
D(Auto Switch)
6
BP-1
BU-1
Cylinder
series
M2.5 X 12 l
C95
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including nut and screw)
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including bracket and screw)
Cylinder
series
CDJP-D
CDU
CP95
C76
C85
Model Selection
Procedures
qInsert the auto switch into the mounting groove and set it at the auto switch mounting position.
wAfter confirming the detecting position, tighten the mounting screw to secure the auto switch.
eModification of the detecting position should be made in step q.
8-57
Information w
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Mounting Bracket
Direct mounting
Auto switch
mounting screw
Cross-recessed
round head screw
with spring washer
M3 X 16 l
qMount the mounting bracket onto the mounting nut by tightening bracket fixing screw lightly through the mounting hole on the top of bracket.
wInsert the mounting bracket assembly (bracket+nut) into the mounting
groove and set it at the auto switch mounting position.
ePush the auto switch mounting screw lightly into the auto switch through
the mounting hole to secure.
rAfter reconfirming detection position, tighten the mounting screw to
secure the auto switch. (Tightening torque should be 0.5 to 0.7Nm.)
Part No. of auto switch mounting bracket (including bracket and screw)
Cylinder series
MK, MK2
8-58
40
BQP1-050
63
BQP1-050
D-C7
D-C8
0.5m
3m
2 wire
46
3 wire
10
50
14
53
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B5
D-B6
22
78
D-B59W
20
76
3m
24
80
25
80
None
2 wire
D-A5
D-A6
3 wire
D-A59W
D-A3C
Reed switch
40
162
50
166
63
184
80
210
116
100
232
114
40
160
D-A3A
D-A44A
50
164
110
63
182
D-G5
50
80
208
13
57
100
230
4 wire
13
56
2 wire
18
68
3 wire
20
78
4 wire
20
74
D-J5
Solid state
switch
3 wire
23
81
4 wire
22
77
3 wire
D-A73C
D-A80C
D-A79W
10
47
11
52
12
54
11
53
2 wire
11
50
3 wire
13
57
4 wire
13
56
13
52
3m
2 wire
35
3 wire
41
D-9
23
D-9A
47
D-E7A
D-E8A
2 wire
10
47
3 wire
11
55
D-Z7
D-Z8
2 wire
49
3 wire
10
55
2 wire
50
colour 3 wire
10
53
2 wire
11
54
colour 3 wire
11
54
2 wire
14
53
3 wire
16
60
D-A9/A9V
Reed switch
(g)
C95
3m
Applicable
auto
switch
1
D-Y
2
Solid state
switch
D-M5
D-Y7BA
-X
(Made to Order)
2 wire
0.5m
Direct mounting
D(Auto Switch)
(g)
Model
D-A7/A7H
D-A8/A80H
CP95
54
D-J79C
71
110
15
Rail mounting
D-F7
21
116
D-H7C
D-J7
D-F5
2 wire
C76
11
3 wire
D-39A
Applicable
auto
switch
D-A44C
2 wire
D-39
Solid state
switch
0.5m
D-A4
D-K5
Reed switch
Model
D-A3
D-H7
Solid state
switch
(g)
Model Selection
Procedures
Reed switch
None
Applicable
auto
switch
Quick Reference
Guide
Tie-rod mounting
C55
Applicable
auto
switch
(g)
C85
Band mounting
54
8-59
8-60
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
-X
(Made to Order)
C95
CP95
C76
C85
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
Model Selection
Procedures
9-1
Series CS1
Purpose of operation
Load factor
0.7 or less
(70% or less)
Dynamic
operation
Series CQ2
1 or less
Horizontal movement of load on guide (100% or less)
0.5 or less
Vertical and horizontal movement of the load (50% or less)(1)
Series CA1
Series CG1
Series MB
Step
Series CM2
Series CJ2
Obtain the air consumption (Graphs 12, 13) that is necessary for
selecting a compressor and for calculating the running cost and the
required air volume (Graph 14) that is necessary for selecting equipment
such as an air filter or a regulator, or the size of the piping upstream.
9-2
20
180
160
0
14
120
5
10
0
50
40
32
25
63
16
50
1000
1000
10
80
25
32
0
20
180
160
0
14
120
5
10
0
25
80
20
63
50
40
30
25
20
15
50
10
63
50
10
100
16
5
4
3
2.5
2
1.5
50
40
30
25
20
15
10
10
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
5
4
3
2.5
2
1.5
10
32
25
20
16
10
5
4
3
2.5
2
1.5
10
0.1
1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.
0. 0. 0.
5 4 3
0.
40
50
40
30
25
20
15
5
4
3
2.5
2
1.5
32
25
20
16
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
10
1
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.08
0.2
0.
0. 0. 0.
5 4 3
0.
Load factor ()
Example:
P=0.5MPa
100
40
Load factor ()
Example:
500
400
300
250
200
150
30
40
500
400
300
250
200
150
Quick Reference
Guide
100
20
180
160
0
14
120
5
C55
5000
4000
3000
2500
2000
1500
50
40
30
25
20
15
80
20
500
400
300
250
200
150
6000
5000
4000
3000
2500
2000
1500
C85
63
10000
0
25
0
C76
100
0
25
0
1000
30
CP95
500
400
300
250
200
150
30
80
60000
50000
40000
30000
25000
20000
15000
C95
1000
-X
(Made to Order)
5000
4000
3000
2500
2000
1500
0
25
0
20
180
160
0
14
120
5
10
0
6000
5000
4000
3000
2500
2000
1500
D(Auto Switch)
10000
30
60000
50000
40000
30000
25000
20000
15000
P=0.4MPa
W
30kg
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
100kg Fig. 3
W
1N 0.102kgf
1kgf 9.8N
9-3
Model Selection
Procedures
P=0.5MPa
CJ2
CA1
CG1
CM2
CS1
1000 CG1-100
10000
CS1-300
200
100
50
CM2-40
500
CM2-32
300
CM2-25
200
CG1-80
5000
CG1-63
CS1-200
3000 CS1-180
CG1-50
2000
CS1-160
CS1-140
CG1-40
CM2-20
CS1-125
30
20
CJ2-16
50
Load (kg)
10
CJ2-10
5
1000
CG1-32
CG1-25
500
Load (kg)
100
Load (kg)
CS1-250
CG1-20
30
20
300
200
CA1-100
CA1-80
CA1-63
CA1-50
CA1-40
3
2
10
100
50
30
20
10
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
100
200 300
500
9-4
1000
100
200 300
500
1000
100
200 300
500
1000
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
CJ2
CG1
C85
MB
CM2
<Graph8> Series MB
1000
CM2-32
300
50 CM2-25
CM2-20
CG1-50
300
200
100
CG1-32
CJ2-16
10
50
Load (kg)
Load (kg)
500
CG1-40
20
CG1-63
CJ2-10
MB100
MB80
MB63
MB50
MB40
100
CG1-25
MB32
CG1-20
30
50
20
-X
(Made to Order)
30
200
CG1-80
Load (kg)
100
500
C95
CM2-40
CP95
200
C76
1000 CG1-100
30
2 CJ2-6
10
20
1
5
0.3
0.2
0.1
D(Auto Switch)
10
0.4
5
4
2
0.05
0.5
100
200 300
100
200 300
500
1000
100
1000
2000
9-5
Model Selection
Procedures
The aspects indicated below may need to be taken into consideration, depending on how the cylinder is operated.
qThe maximum stroke at which the cylinder can be operated under a lateral load.
Bushing (Bearing)
fR
The region that does not exceed the bold solid line represents the allowable lateral load in relation to the
cylinder of a given stroke length. In the graph, the range of the broken line shows that the long stroke
limit has been exceeded. In this region, as a rule, operate the cylinder by providing a guide along the
direction of movement.
<Graph8>
<Graph9>
50
40
30
20
10
CM2
5
4
40
CM2
32
CM2
1
CM2
25
50
40
30
20
C G11
00
C G18
0
10
C G 1 63
CG1
50
C G14
0
5
4
3
2
C G 1 32
20
C G 1
25
CG12
0
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.4
0.3
100
0.2
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900 1000
0.1
500
1000
1500
<Graph10>
300
3000
200
2000
100
50
40
MB
1
00
CA
11
00
MB
8
0C
A1
80
MB
6
3A
16
3
MB
5
0C
A1
MB
50
4
0C
A1
40
MB
3
2
30
20
10
5
4
3
2
500
1000
500
400
300
CS1
300
CS1
250
200
100
CS1 CS180
16
CS
0
1
140
CS1
12
5
50
40
30
20
1000
9-6
<Graph11>
Series CS1/125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 250, 300
Lateral load applied to the rod end (fR)(N)
1500
10
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2400
Quick Reference
Guide
Assuming that the force that is generated by the cylinder itself acts as a buckling force on the piston rod or on the
piston rod and the cylinder tube, the table below indicates in centimeters the maximum stroke that can be used,
which was obtained through calculation.
Therefore, it is possible to find the maximum stroke that can be used with each cylinder size according to the
relationship between the level of the operating pressure and the type of cylinder mounting, regardless of the load
factor.
Reference: Even under a light load, if the piston rod has been stopped by an external stopper at the extending side
of the cylinder, the maximum force generated by the cylinder will act upon the cylinder itself.
C55
wThe relationship between the cylinder size and the maximum stroke depending on the mounting style
Front
Rear
Foot: L flange: F flange: G
W
CG1
MB
MB/CA1
CS1
MPa 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
C85
CM2
0.3 39 49 56 61 38 49 55 80 100 78 96 112 71 81 102 79 98 114 131 117 126 141 158 182 206
L
C76
Mounting bracket
diagram
Symbol
Mounting style
Operating
pressure
(cm)
0.3 16 20 24 25 15 21 24 36 45 34 42 50 31 35 46 34 42 50 57 49 53 60 68 79 90
0.7 8
Front
Clevis: C, D trunnion: U
W
11 13 13
11 13 21 27 20 24 29 19 21 27 19 24 29 34 28 30 34 40 45 53
0.3 36 46 53 56 37 47 53 78 98 76 94 109 67 76 96 73 91 105 122 106 118 130 146 167 190
C
CP95
G 0.5 11 14 17 17 11 14 17 26 33 25 31 37 23 26 34 25 31 37 42 35 38 44 50 58 66
0.3 37 47 54 58 38 48 55 79 100 78
93 105 134 103 128 149 171 151 163 183 206 235 267
T 0.5 27 35 40 43 28 36 41 60 76 59
0.7 22 29 33 35 23 30 34 50 63 48
CA1/CS1 only
W
Front
Rear
Foot: L flange: F flange: G
W
0.3 118 147 166 181 117 147 166 237 296 234 288 333 206 234 295 231 287 330 382 339 366 412 459 527 598
L
0.5 90 113 128 139 89 112 127 182 228 180 221 256 158 179 226 177 219 253 293 263 281 315 252 403 458
0.7 76 95 107 117 75 94 107 153 192 151 186 215 132 150 190 148 184 212 245 218 235 265 296 339 385
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
Rear
Center
trunnion: U trunnion: U
C95
0.3 168 210 237 258 167 210 236 337 422 334 411 474 280 318 423 313 412 476 549 489 528 594 661 762 863
L
W
W
0.5 129 162 183 199 128 161 182 260 325 257 316 366 234 266 339 257 317 367 423 377 407 457 509 587 665
0.7 109 136 154 167 108 135 153 219 274 216 266 308 194 220 275 216 267 309 356 317 343 385 429 494 561
0.3 80 101 114 123 80 101 114 164 206 162 200 231 136 154 206 151 199 231 266 235 254 287 320 369 419
G 0.5 61 77 87 94 61 77 87 126 158 124 152 177 110 125 158 123 152 176 203 179 194 218 244 281 320
0.7 50 64 72 78 50 64 73 105 132 103 127 148 93 105 132 102 127 147 170 149 144 182 204 235 268
9-7
Model Selection
Procedures
0.3 55 69 79 85 55 70 79 114 143 112 138 161 99 112 142 116 136 158 183 160 173 196 218 251 286
G 0.5 41 52 60 64 41 52 60 87 109 85 105 122 75 85 108 83 102 119 138 120 131 147 165 189 216
Obtain the cylinder's air consumption and its required air volume.
Step 1
Using Graph 12, obtain the air consumption of the air cylinder.
qSeek the point at which the operating pressure (diagonal
line) intersects with the cylinder stroke, and from that point,
perpendicularly extend a vertical line upward.
wFrom the point at which it intersects with the bore size
(diagonal line) of the cylinder to be used, look sideways
(either to the right or left) to obtain the air consumption that
is required by one cycle of the air cylinder.
Step 3
500
400
300
200
150
100
Step 2
1000
Using Graph 14, obtain the air cylinder's required air volume.
9-8
10
5
4
3
2
1
30
0
25
0
20
180
160
140
120
5
10
0
1000
500
400
300
Bore size
(mm)
80
63
50
40
30
0
25
0
20
180
160
140
120
5
10
0
32
25
20
16
10
80
63
50
40
0.6
5000
4000
3000
32
25
2000
1500
20
16
1000
Step 3
20
15
1.5
Example: When 10 air cylinders with a 50mm bore size and a 600mm
stroke are used at a pressure of 0.5MPa, what is the air
consumption of their 5 cycles per minute?
(A 2m tube with a 6mm bore is used for piping between the
cylinders and the switching valve.)
1. Operating pressure 0.5MPa cylinder stroke 600mm
bore size 50mm air consumption volume 13 l
(ANR)
2. Operating pressure 0.5MPa piping length 2m bore
6mm air consumption 0.56 l (ANR)
3. Total air consumption = (13 + 0.56) X 10 X 5 = 678 l/min (ANR)
50
40
30
3000
2000
1500
500
400
300
10
6
200
150
200
150
100
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
4
3
2
1.5
1
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.015
0.01
100
50
Operating pressure (MPa)
0.
0 0.
0. 0..6 0.4 0.3 2
8 7 5
C55
Quick Reference
Guide
100
30000
20000
30000
20000
50
40
50
40
15000
15000
10000
10000
30
30
20
20
3000
2000
3/
4"
1/
2"
0.5
0.4
12
0.3
13
3/8
9
200
150
100
50
40
30
0.3
0.2
20
8 7.
5
10
15
0.1
10
8
0.02
1.5
1
0.01
0.5
0.4
2000
0.005
63
50
32
25
20
16
10
1500
0.03
5
2.
0.05
0.04
Max. piston speed mm/s
5
4
80
1500
1000
500
400
300
200
150
100
40
0.5
0.4
1/4"
0.2
500
400
300
2000
1000
C95
3000
50
40
30
20
-X
(Made to Order)
5000
4000
15
10
5
4
3
D(Auto Switch)
1000
0
20
0
18
160
0
14
120
5
10
0
6
500
400
300
200
0.5
Model Selection
Procedures
5
4
5
4
1"
1500
C76
10
30
25
100
0.3
2
0.
3
0.
4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.
2
0. .3
0
4
0. 0.5
6
0. 0.7
8
0.
CP95
10
5000
4000
C85
100
<Graph 13> Air consumption of tube or steel pipe (For one cycle)
The piping length is the length of the steel pipe or tube that connects the cylinder with the
switching valve (solenoid valve, etc.).
9-9
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or
equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard
by labeling "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To ensure safety, be sure to
observe ISO4414 Note 1), JIS B 8370 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Warning
qThe compatibility of pneumatic equipment is the responsibility of the person
and equipment.
Compressed air can be dangerous if an operator is unfamiliar with it. Assembly, handling or repair of
pneumatic systems should be performed by trained and experienced operators.
safety is confirmed.
1. Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after confirmation of
safe locked-out control positions.
2. When equipment is to be removed, confirm the safety process as mentioned above. Cut the supply
pressure for the equipment and exhaust all residual compressed air in the system.
3. Before machinery/equipment is re-started, take measures to prevent quick extensions of the
cylinder piston rod etc. (Bleed air into the system gradually to create back-pressure.)
9-10
Actuator Precautionsq
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Refer to the selection procedures for the air cylinder to be used for
the maximum usable stroke.
Quick Reference
Guide
Caution
C55
wIntermediate stops.
C76
Model Selection
Procedures
D(Auto Switch)
CP95
C95
Warning
-X
(Made to Order)
Warning
Selection
C85
Design
9-11
Actuator Precautionsw
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Mounting
Cushion
Caution
Caution
qMake sure to connect the rod and the load so that
their axial center and movement directions match.
If they do not match, stress could be applied to the rod and the
tube, causing the inner surface of the tube, the bushing, the rod
surface, and the seals to wear and to become damaged.
tDo not use until you verify that the equipment can
operate properly.
After mounting, repair or modification, etc., connect the air supply
and electric power, and then confirm proper mounting by means of
appropriate function and leak inspections.
yInstruction manual.
The product should be mounted and operated after thoroughly
reading the manual and understanding its contents.
Keep the instruction manual where it can be referred to as needed.
Lubrication
Caution
qLubricating the lube style cylinder
Install a lubricator in the circuit, and use class 1 turbine oil (nonadditive) ISO VG32. Do not use machine oil or spindle oil.
wLubrication of cylinder.
The cylinder has been lubricated for life at the factory and can be
used without any further lubrication.
However, in the event that it will be lubricated, use class 1 turbine
oil (with no additives) ISO VG32.
Stopping lubrication later may lead to malfunction due to the loss
of the original lubricant. Therefore, lubrication must be continued
once it has been started.
Air Supply
Piping
Warning
Caution
po
se
Pipe tape
ap
pr
ox
.2
thr
ea
9-12
ds
Caution
qInstall air filters.
Install air filters at the upstream side of valves. The filtration degree
should be 5m or less.
Actuator Precautionse
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
Caution
qDrain flushing.
Remove condensate from air filters regularly.
C76
CP95
If the area is very dusty, use the type with a heavy duty scraper
(-XC4). If fluids splash on the cylinder, use a cylinder with improved
water resistance.
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
Warning
Model Selection
Procedures
Warning
Maintenance
C85
Operating Environment
9-13
Actuator Precautionsr
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Air-hydro Cylinder
Design
Piping
Caution
Warning
qDo not use an air-hydro cylinder near flames, or
in equipment or machinery that exceeds an
ambient temperatures of 60C.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire, because
an air hydro-cylinder uses hydraulic oil that is flammable.
Caution
qDo not use it in an environment, equipment, or
machine that is not compatible with oil mist.
Selection
Lubrication
Warning
qMake sure to completely discharge the compressed air in the system before filling the
air-hydro unit with hydraulic oil.
Before filling the air-hydro unit with hydraulic oil, verify that proper measures are taken to prevent the driven objects from falling and that safety measures are taken to prevent the clamped
objects from becoming detached. Then, shut off the air supply,
turn off the power supply to the equipment, and discharge the
compressed air.
It would be dangerous to open the oil inlet on the air hydro unit
while compressed air remains in the air-hydro system because
the hydraulic oil could spray out.
Caution
qSelect an air-hydro cylinder in combination with
an air-hydro unit.
Because an air-hydro cylinder operates most favorably when it
is combined with an air-hydro unit, select an appropriate
air-hydro unit.
Maintenance
Caution
qBleed air from the air-hydro cylinder on a regular
basis.
Because pockets of air could be created in the air-hydro cylinder, bleed air from it periodically, such as at the beginning of
work. Bleed air at the air hydro cylinder or at the air bleeder valve that is provided on the pipe.
wVerify the oil level of the air hydro system on a regular basis.
Because a small amount of hydraulic oil is discharged from the
air-hydro cylinder and the air-hydro unit circuit, the oil level decreases gradually. Therefore, check the oil level and replenish
the system with oil if necessary.
The oil level can be checked with a level gauge in the air-hydro
converter.
9-14
Warning
V (mm/s) =
C55
C85
C76
CP95
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
Model Selection
Procedures
Quick Reference
Guide
Load
9-15
Warning
qDo not drop or bump.
Do not drop, bump or apply excessive impacts (300m/s2 or more for
reed switches and 1000m/s2 or more for solid state switches) while
handling.
Although the body of the switch may not be damaged, the inside of
the switch could be damaged and cause a malfunction.
Wiring
Warning
qAvoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead wires.
Broken lead wires will result from applying bending stress or
stretching forces to the lead wires.
2 wire
Old
Output (+) Red
Output () Black
3 wire
New
Brown
Blue
Solid state
with diagnostic output
Old
Power supply Red
GND
Black
Output
White
Diagnostic output Yellow
9-16
New
Brown
Blue
Black
Orange
Old
New
Brown
Blue
Black
New
Brown
Blue
Black
Orange
C76
Quick Reference
Guide
C55
Warning
Other
Warning
qConsult SMC concerning water resistance, elasticity
of lead wires, and usage at welding sites, etc.
CP95
Warning
Maintenance
C85
Operating Environment
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
<Reed switch>
When excessive impact (300m/s2 or more) is applied to a reed
switch during operation, the contact point will malfunction and
generate or cut off a signal momentarily (1ms or less). Consult
SMC regarding the need to use a solid state switch depending
upon the environment.
D(Auto Switch)
Model Selection
Procedures
9-17
Meaning
Indication example
Mark
Meaning
Indication example
Series
YOS: DIN (1)
terminal without
connector
Coil voltage
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
100V AC (50/60Hz)
200V AC (50/60Hz)
110V AC (50/60Hz)
220V AC (50/60Hz)
24V DC
12V DC
Others
Introducing
"Made to Order
Specifications"
Order
Made
Power Saver
Power consumption is decreased by 1/3 by reducing the wattage required to hold the valve
in an energized state.
Operating Principles
Specifications
3000
Series
SYJ 5000 T
12, 24DC
7000
Power consumption
(W)
Inrush
0.55
Holding
0.22
Precautions to
be read before
handling.
SYJ3000/5000/7000
Ordeer
Mad
How to Order
3
SYJ 5
7
LED
Red (+)
Diode
YO: DIN
YZ: DIN (1)
terminal without connector
connector
Y: DIN
connector
Coil
1:Starting
current
Black ()
2:Holding
current
Connector
AXT661-12
nector
Lead wire
0.2 to 0.33mm2
(Max.O.D. 1.7mm)
Pin
Lever
Reference
pages
Groove
Hook
Socket
DXT170-71-1
Red (DC)
100V AC
110V AC
200V AC
220V AC
Blue
Red
100V AC
110V AC
200V AC
220V AC
Indicator light
Description
Pressure
Force/Load
Moment of force
Symbol
SI unitConventional unit
MPa
1kgf/cm2 0.098MPa
1MPa 10.2kgf/cm2
1kgf 9.8N
1N 0.102kgf
Nm
1kgfm 9.8Nm
1Nm 0.102kgfm
Vacuum pressure
kPa
1mmHg 0.133kPa
1kPa 7.5mmHg
Moment of inertia
kgm2
1kgfcmS2 0.098kgm2
1kgm2 10.2kgfcmS2
1kgfcm 0.098J
1J 10.2kgfcm
Kinetic energy
0.03
0.31
0.04
0.41
0.05
0.51
0.06
0.61
0.07
0.71
0.08
0.82
0.09
0.92
0.1
1.0
0.11
1.1
0.12
1.2
0.13
1.3
0.14
1.4
0.15
1.5
0.16
1.6
0.17
1.7
0.18
1.8
0.19
1.9
0.2
2.0
MPa
kgf/cm2
0.3
3.1
0.4
4.1
0.5
5.1
0.6
6.1
0.7
7.1
0.8
8.2
0.9
9.2
1.0
10.2
1.1
11.2
1.2
12.2
1.3
13.3
1.4
14.3
1.5
15.3
1.6
16.3
1.7
17.3
1.8
18.4
1.9
19.4
2.0
20.4
2.5
25.5
MPa
3.0
kgf/cm2 30.6
3.5
35.7
4.0
40.8
4.5
45.9
5.0
51.0
5.5
56.1
6.0
61.2
6.5
66.3
7.0
71.4
7.5
76.5
8.0
81.6
8.5
86.7
9.0
9.9
91.8 101.0
10
102
20
204
30
306
40
408
50
510
0.1
0.01
0.2
0.02
0.3
0.03
0.4
0.04
0.5
0.05
0.6
0.06
0.7
0.07
0.8
0.08
0.9
0.09
1.0
0.1
1.1
0.11
1.2
0.12
1.3
0.13
1.4
0.14
1.5
0.15
1.6
0.16
1.7
0.17
1.8
0.18
1.9
0.19
N
kgf
2
0.2
3
0.3
4
0.4
5
0.5
6
0.6
7
0.7
8
0.8
9
0.9
10
1.0
11
1.1
12
1.2
13
1.3
14
1.4
15
1.5
16
1.6
17
1.7
18
1.8
19
1.9
20
2.0
N
kgf
30
3
40
4
50
5
60
6
70
7
80
8
90
9
100
10
110
11
120
12
130
13
140
14
150
15
160
16
170
17
180
18
190
19
200
20
250
25
N
kgf
300
30
350
35
400
40
450
45
500
50
550
55
600
60
650
65
700
70
750
75
800
80
850
85
900
90
950
95
9-18
Pneumatics Symbols
DIN ISO1219-1, 03/96. Graphic symbols for pneumatic equipment.
Volume 1
Directional control valve
5/3-way valve,
exhaust
neutral position
C85
C55
Description
Manual Control
General
Manual Control
Button
Manual Control
Lever
Manual Control
Pedal
Mechanical
Control
Plunger
Mechanical
Control
Spring
Mechanical
Control
Roller
Mechanical
Control Roller
with idle return
Solenoid with
one effective
winding
Solenoid with
two windings
acting in opposition
Combined Control
by solenoid and
pilot valve
Pressure
Control
Shuttle valve
PneumaticElectric-Relay
Pneumatic
indicator
Silencer
Pressure Control
Valve
Air operated
Mechanical
Component
Detent
C76
Symbol
CP95
Description
Model Selection
Procedures
Symbol
Quick Reference
Guide
For assistance a table below shows both ISO symbols, which may differ
from JIS symbols in this catalogue, and common ISO/JIS/SMC Symbols.
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
There are several symbol systems and conventions in use around the
world, most officially recognised by standards bodies. Commonly used is
ISO1219-1.
The situation also occurs when SMC develop new product systems for
which an ISO or JIS symbol does not exit. Examples include the MGZ high
power cylinder or the AV series air operated soft start / release valve. In
this situation either a composite symbol showing a representative circuit is
used, or the nearest standard symbol is modified by SMC.
D(Auto Switch)
Circuit symbols are used through this catalogue and on the labels of most
SMC Pneumatic products.
9-19
Pneumatics Symbols
DIN ISO1219-1, 03/96. Graphic symbols for pneumatic equipment.
Volume 2
Symbol
9-20
Description
Symbol
Description
Single-acting cylinder,
single piston rod, return stroke
by external force
Single-acting cylinder,
single piston rod,
stroke by spring,
return stroke by air pressure
Double-acting cylinder,
single piston rod
Single-acting cylinder,
non rotating single piston rod,
stroke by spring,
return stroke by air pressure
Double-acting cylinder,
non-rotating
single piston rod
Double-acting cylinder
with cushioning adjustable
at both ends,
single piston rod
Double-acting cylinder,
rear boss mount,
single piston rod
Double-acting cylinder
with cushioning adjustable
at both ends,
double piston rod
Double-acting
air-hydro cylinder,
single piston rod
Magnetically coupled
rodless cylinder
Double-acting cylinder
with double
piston rod
Double-acting cylinder,
single piston rod,
with built in speed controller
Double-acting cylinder
with double
non rotating piston rod
Double-acting cylinder,
double piston rod,
with built in speed controller
Double-acting
air-hydro cylinder
with double piston rod
Single-acting cylinder,
single piston rod,
return stroke by spring
Single-acting cylinder,
non rotating single piston rod,
return stroke by spring
Double-acting cylinder
with lock,
single piston rod
Pneumatics Symbols
DIN ISO1219-1, 03/96. Graphic symbols for pneumatic equipment.
Volume 3
Description
Safety speed control valve.
Meter-out control style: A
control valve with cylinder
speed control function, fixed throttle,
rapid air supply function
Safety speed control valve.
Meter-in control style: A
control valve with cylinder
speed function and rapid
air supply function
Vacuum ejector
Vacuum ejector,
with built-in silencer
Non-return valve,
dual speed controller
with one-touch fittings
C95
-X
(Made to Order)
D(Auto Switch)
CP95
C76
C85
Quick Reference
Guide
Semi-rotary actuator,
double acting
Symbol
C55
Description
Model Selection
Procedures
Symbol
Speed controller
with pilot check valve
9-21
Pneumatics Symbols
DIN ISO1219-1, 03/96. Graphic symbols for pneumatic equipment.
Volume 4
Symbol
Description
Pressure control valve,
relieving pressure regulator,
adjustable
Mist separator
Lubricator
Dryer
Cooler
9-22
Symbol
Description
Air preparator,
Service unit (simplified graph)
Air combination,
Air filter, regulator
and Lubricator
Air combination,
Air filter and regulator
Air combination,
Air filter, mist separator
and regulator
Air combination,
Mist separator, regulator
and pressure gauge
Pneumatic capacitor
Non-return valve,
without spring
ISO/VDMA Cylinders
EUROPEAN SUBSIDIARIES:
Austria
SMC Pneumatik GmbH (Austria).
Girakstrasse 8, A-2100 Korneuburg
Phone: +43 2262-62280, Fax: +43 2262-62285
E-mail: office@smc.at
http://www.smc.at
France
SMC Pneumatique, S.A.
1, Boulevard de Strasbourg, Parc Gustave Eiffel
Bussy Saint Georges F-77607 Marne La Vallee Cedex 3
Phone: +33 (0)1-6476 1000, Fax: +33 (0)1-6476 1010
E-mail: contact@smc-france.fr
http://www.smc-france.fr
Netherlands
SMC Pneumatics BV
De Ruyterkade 120, NL-1011 AB Amsterdam
Phone: +31 (0)20-5318888, Fax: +31 (0)20-5318880
E-mail: info@smcpneumatics.nl
http://www.smcpneumatics.nl
Spain
SMC Espaa, S.A.
Zuazobidea 14, 01015 Vitoria
Phone: +34 945-184 100, Fax: +34 945-184 124
E-mail: post@smc.smces.es
http://www.smces.es
Belgium
SMC Pneumatics N.V./S.A.
Nijverheidsstraat 20, B-2160 Wommelgem
Phone: +32 (0)3-355-1464, Fax: +32 (0)3-355-1466
E-mail: post@smcpneumatics.be
http://www.smcpneumatics.be
Germany
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
Boschring 13-15, D-63329 Egelsbach
Phone: +49 (0)6103-4020, Fax: +49 (0)6103-402139
E-mail: info@smc-pneumatik.de
http://www.smc-pneumatik.de
Norway
SMC Pneumatics Norway A/S
Vollsveien 13 C, Granfos Nringspark N-1366 Lysaker
Tel: +47 67 12 90 20, Fax: +47 67 12 90 21
E-mail: post@smc-norge.no
http://www.smc-norge.no
Sweden
SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB
Ekhagsvgen 29-31, S-141 71 Huddinge
Phone: +46 (0)8-603 12 00, Fax: +46 (0)8-603 12 90
E-mail: post@smcpneumatics.se
http://www.smc.nu
Bulgaria
SMC Industrial Automation Bulgaria EOOD
16 kliment Ohridski Blvd., fl.13 BG-1517 Sofia
Phone:+359 2 9744492, Fax:+359 2 9744519
E-mail: office@smc.bg
http://www.smc.bg
Greece
S. Parianopoulus S.A.
7, Konstantinoupoleos Street, GR-11855 Athens
Phone: +30 (0)1-3426076, Fax: +30 (0)1-3455578
E-mail: parianos@hol.gr
http://www.smceu.com
Poland
SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp.z.o.o.
ul. Konstruktorska 11A, PL-02-673 Warszawa,
Phone: +48 22 548 5085, Fax: +48 22 548 5087
E-mail: office@smc.pl
http://www.smc.pl
Switzerland
SMC Pneumatik AG
Dorfstrasse 7, CH-8484 Weisslingen
Phone: +41 (0)52-396-3131, Fax: +41 (0)52-396-3191
E-mail: info@smc.ch
http://www.smc.ch
Croatia
SMC Industrijska automatika d.o.o.
Crnomerec 12, 10000 ZAGREB
Phone: +385 1 377 66 74, Fax: +385 1 377 66 74
E-mail: office@smc.hr
http://www.smceu.com
Hungary
SMC Hungary Ipari Automatizlsi Kft.
Budafoki ut 107-113, H-1117 Budapest
Phone: +36 1 371 1343, Fax: +36 1 371 1344
E-mail: office@smc-automation.hu
http://www.smc-automation.hu
Portugal
SMC Sucursal Portugal, S.A.
Rua de Eng Ferreira Dias 452, 4100-246 Porto
Phone: +351 22-610-89-22, Fax: +351 22-610-89-36
E-mail: postpt@smc.smces.es
http://www.smces.es
Turkey
Entek Pnmatik San. ve Tic Ltd. Sti.
Perpa Tic. Merkezi Kat: 11 No: 1625, TR-80270 Okmeydani Istanbul
Phone: +90 (0)212-221-1512, Fax: +90 (0)212-221-1519
E-mail: smc-entek@entek.com.tr
http://www.entek.com.tr
Czech Republic
SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o.
Hudcova 78a, CZ-61200 Brno
Phone: +420 5 414 24611, Fax: +420 5 412 18034
E-mail: office@smc.cz
http://www.smc.cz
Ireland
SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd.
2002 Citywest Business Campus, Naas Road, Saggart, Co. Dublin
Phone: +353 (0)1-403 9000, Fax: +353 (0)1-464-0500
E-mail: sales@smcpneumatics.ie
http://www.smcpneumatics.ie
Romania
SMC Romania srl
Str Frunzei 29, Sector 2, Bucharest
Phone: +40 213205111, Fax: +40 213261489
E-mail: smcromania@smcromania.ro
http://www.smcromania.ro
UK
SMC Pneumatics (UK) Ltd
Vincent Avenue, Crownhill, Milton Keynes, MK8 0AN
Phone: +44 (0)800 1382930 Fax: +44 (0)1908-555064
E-mail: sales@smcpneumatics.co.uk
http://www.smcpneumatics.co.uk
Denmark
SMC Pneumatik A/S
Knudsminde 4B, DK-8300 Odder
Phone: +45 70252900, Fax: +45 70252901
E-mail: smc@smc-pneumatik.dk
http://www.smcdk.com
Italy
SMC Italia S.p.A
Via Garibaldi 62, I-20061Carugate, (Milano)
Phone: +39 (0)2-92711, Fax: +39 (0)2-9271365
E-mail: mailbox@smcitalia.it
http://www.smcitalia.it
Russia
SMC Pneumatik LLC.
36/40 Sredny pr. St. Petersburg 199004
Phone.:+812 118 5445, Fax:+812 118 5449
E-mail: smcfa@peterlink.ru
http://www.smc-pneumatik.ru
Estonia
SMC Pneumatics Estonia O
Laki 12-101, 106 21 Tallinn
Phone: +372 (0)6 593540, Fax: +372 (0)6 593541
E-mail: smc@smcpneumatics.ee
http://www.smcpneumatics.ee
Latvia
SMC Pneumatics Latvia SIA
Smerla 1-705, Riga LV-1006, Latvia
Phone: +371 (0)777-94-74, Fax: +371 (0)777-94-75
E-mail: info@smclv.lv
http://www.smclv.lv
Slovakia
SMC Priemyseln Automatizci, s.r.o.
Nmestie Martina Benku 10, SK-81107 Bratislava
Phone: +421 2 444 56725, Fax: +421 2 444 56028
E-mail: office@smc.sk
http://www.smc.sk
Finland
SMC Pneumatics Finland OY
PL72, Tiistinniityntie 4, SF-02031 ESPOO
Phone: +358 207 513513, Fax: +358 207 513595
E-mail: smcfi@smc.fi
http://www.smc.fi
Lithuania
UAB Ottensten Lietuva
Savanoriu pr. 180, LT-2600 Vilnius, Lithuania
Phone/Fax: +370-2651602
Slovenia
SMC industrijska Avtomatika d.o.o.
Grajski trg 15, SLO-8360 Zuzemberk
Phone: +386 738 85240 Fax: +386 738 85249
E-mail: office@smc-ind-avtom.si
http://www.smc-ind-avtom.si
DiskArt 1988
DiskArt
http://www.smceu.com
http://www.smcworld.com
SMC CORPORATION 1-16-4 Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokio 105 JAPAN; Phone:03-3502-2740 Fax:03-3508-2480
Produced and printed by SMC European Marketing Centre 2/05